JP2018042630A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: Variable means is varied in any one of a plurality of modes including at least a first variable mode and second variable mode, on the basis of the fact that a failure determination result is made with determination of determination means. The variable means is varied in a third variable mode including at least a specific variable mode which appears to be difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode, on the basis of the fact that a specific determination result is made with determination by the determination means. In the period until satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition from the end of a first privilege game, while the first variable state in which the variable means is easily varied in the first variable mode is set, the second variable state in which the variable means is easily varied in the second variable mode than the first variable state is set, in the period until satisfaction of a specific condition after completion of a second privilege game. Thereby, it is possible to increase a player's interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 107

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by making different game values that can be acquired.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, as long as it continues to be out of the lottery, it is not possible to enjoy the winning game. There was a risk that this would be difficult.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is based on a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a game based on the fact that a discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the user, and a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game as types of privilege games executed by the privilege game executing means. A type determination unit that determines one type from at least a plurality of types, a variable unit that can be varied in a predetermined variable mode, and a determination result that is different from the specific determination result by the determination unit. Based on the above, the first variable control for varying the variable means in any one of the plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode different from the first variable mode. The variable means is variable in a third variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode based on the determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit. The variable means is variable in the first variable mode by the first variable control means between the second variable control means to be performed and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied after the first bonus game is completed. The first variable state that is likely to be set is set, and the variable means is varied in the second variable mode from the first variable state until the specific condition is satisfied after the second bonus game is completed. Variable state setting means for setting the second variable state that facilitates.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the variable means can enter the game ball into the ball entry means. The first position can be varied between a first position and a second position at which the game ball is harder to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is based on the passage of the first period. A variable mode in which the second position is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the second variable mode is based on the passage of a second period different from the first period. To the first position for a predetermined period.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the determination unit includes a first determination unit that performs a first determination based on establishment of a first determination condition; Second discriminating means for executing the second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition, wherein the first variable control means is discriminating by the first discriminating means. The variable means is varied in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode based on the result of the determination of detachment. The second variable control unit varies the variable unit in the third variable mode based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination unit.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the type determining means is executed based on the specific determination result in the second determination by the second determination means. The type of the award game to be played is determined.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the first determination condition is a period from the end of the bonus game until the specific condition is satisfied. This is more easily established than the determination condition.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. Based on the determination result obtained by the determination means, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected by the type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. It is determined. A plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode based on the determination by the determining unit that results in an outlier determination result different from the specific determination result. The variable means is varied by the first variable control means in any one of the variable modes. The variable means is controlled by the second variable control means in the third variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode based on the determination result by the determination unit. Variable. The first variable state is easily changed by the first variable control means in the first variable mode from the end of the first privilege game until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Is set. On the other hand, the variable state setting means sets the second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed in the second variable mode than the first variable state between the end of the second privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition. Is done.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is configured in a variable mode in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period. The second variable mode is a second variable different from the first period. Based on the passage of the period, the variable means is configured to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

  Thus, the effect that the player can easily identify whether the variable means is the first variable mode or the second variable mode by checking the interval until the variable means is changed to the first position. There is.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode based on the result of the determination by the first determination unit. The variable means is varied by the means. The variable means is varied in the third variable manner by the second variable control means based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means.

  Thereby, according to the type of the bonus game, the variable mode of the variable means in the case where the determination result by the first determination means results in an outage determination result is varied, so the first determination means until the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means each time the determination by is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the third aspect, a privilege that is executed based on the fact that the second determination by the second determination means has a specific determination result Since the type of game is determined by the type determining means, whether the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined when the second determination by the second determination means is executed. There is an effect that a game can be played with attention.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, the first determination condition is from the end of the bonus game until the specific condition is established. Since it becomes easier to be established than the second determination condition, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is satisfied.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 65 in the La-La line of FIG.5 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 65 in the Lb-Lb line of FIG.5 (c). And (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65. (A) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state where the switching member is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path, and (b) is a special view in which the flow path solenoid is inactive. It is a rear view of the back cover body which shows the state which the opening piece of the entrance of a discharge flow path has block | closed the guidance piece of the switching member. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of 3 symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the jackpot displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the entrance to the 2nd entrance in the jackpot It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode at the time of detecting. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the door breakthrough mode effect performed with the start of the ending period after all rounds of jackpots were completed in 1st Embodiment, (b) These are the schematic diagrams which showed an example of the display mode at the time of breaking through the 1st door in door breakthrough mode production. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of failing to break through the 4th door in the door breakthrough mode production | presentation displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, ( (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of succeeding in breaking through all the doors in the door breakthrough mode production | presentation displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the display mode in the case of shifting to probability changing mode, and the state of a specific winning opening, and (b) is the second reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding | compatible relationship between the display mode and the state of a specific winning opening when shifting to the normal mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed regulation content typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the main control in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd random number table set to ROM of the apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special table 1 per table. (C) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the special figure 1 out (normal) table, (d) is the special figure 1 out (probability) table prescription. It is the figure which showed the content typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription content of the table for special figure 2 big hits (4 fluctuations or less), (b) is the figure which prescribes the prescription contents of the table for special figure 2 big hits (5 fluctuations or more). (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 deviation (4 fluctuations or less) table, and (d) is a special figure 2 deviation (5 fluctuations or more). It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the table for use. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. . It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning medium winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the end of small hits performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the round performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the number command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of this. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd random number table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state determination process at the time of the execution performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the breakthrough mode selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which illustrated the case where in a modification of a 2nd embodiment, the storage valve is in the protruding state (the state where three balls which are the upper limit number are stored above the storage valve). Yes, (b) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is buried in the modification of the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the jackpot opening displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in 1 round of jackpots displayed by. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of completion | finish of 1 round of jackpot displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the 3rd symbol in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in the interval after 1 round of jackpot displayed on a display apparatus. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the 1st per category selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the open scenario selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the figure of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the promotion effect lottery table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (C) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the sound lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the open scenario selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the promotion effect lottery process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case of the jackpot opening displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the modification of 3rd Embodiment, and the reach-off, (b) is 3rd implementation. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the 1st round of jackpot displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the modification of form. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect in the modification of 3rd Embodiment, and (b) is super in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of a detachment | leaching. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the table for special hits and hits tables in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the table for special hit | disappearance loss in 4th Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, entrance holes 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails and windmills, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the sorting member 660, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a start port or the like is disposed, Area). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and the ball enters the normal entrance. When passing 67, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and at the same time, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or until seven balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are 6 types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack F”. After the special game state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to the results of the jackpot game Value (game value) is given to the player. Note that the three types of “big hits A to C” are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is executed in response to a ball entering the first entrance 64, and “ The three types of jackpots D to F are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is performed by a lottery executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball enters the second entrance. The special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the ball outlet 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each of the balls is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When the normal symbol is hit, the first entrance 64 is changed by changing the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). Opened. In addition, since the electric accessory 64a is normally disposed at the closed position, the right side and the left side of the first entrance 64 are closed. Therefore, the ball rolling from the right side and the left side of the front view toward the first entrance 64 cannot enter the first entrance 64 due to being blocked by the electric accessory 64a (difficulty). ) For this reason, during normal times, basically only the sphere that has flowed down from the top vertically in the front view with respect to the first entrance 64 can enter the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball that rolls from the right side and the left side of the front view toward the first entrance 64 is opened by opening the electric accessory 64a. As a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are six types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack F”.

When the “big hit A” and the “big hit D” are reached, a special gaming state (16 rounds big hit) with 16 rounds is set. On the other hand, when “Big Bonus B” is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special gaming state of 5 rounds (5 rounds of Big Bonus). When the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 7 rounds (7 rounds jackpot) and becomes a “big hit F”, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 6 rounds (6 rounds jackpot). Furthermore, when a specific condition is satisfied during each of the jackpot games (when a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 passes a probability change switch 65e3 described later), a high probability state (special) of a special symbol after the jackpot ends. Moves to (during symbol change). In addition, when a high probability state of a special symbol is given,
Also increases the probability of hitting a normal symbol (provides a short time state for a normal symbol). The high probability state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol continue after the jackpot ends until the next jackpot. On the other hand, if the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball does not pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the special symbol has a low probability state until the next big hit, and the normal symbol hit Probability is also normal probability (normal state of normal symbol).

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called “high probability state of a special symbol” (special symbol probability variation state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol high-probability state) means a gaming state in which a normal symbol hit probability is increased and a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state” (ordinary symbol low probability state), which is a normal symbol hit probability normal state, that is, shorter than the short-time state Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a special symbol probability change period. Further, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol short time period.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the jackpot varies according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all five rounds). Further, in the present embodiment, the “special symbol probability changing state” and “ordinary symbol time-short state” given after the jackpot are continued until the next jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the “special symbol probable state” and the “normal symbol time-short state” may be limited until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of lotteries that will be in the “special symbol probable state” may be different from the number of lotteries that will be in the “normal symbol time-short state”. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which varies the number of lotteries according to the type of jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power, etc., the “special symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol normal state” are always set. If the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the state shifts from the “special symbol low probability state” to the “special symbol probability change state” and from the “normal symbol normal state”. Move to "Normal symbol time-short state". In this case, the set “probability change state of special symbol” and “short-time state of normal symbol” continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, if the ball has never passed the probability variation switch 65e3 at the big hit of 1, it shifts to a “special symbol low probability state” and a “normal symbol normal state”. Although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when “big hit A to D” is reached, the ball easily passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, and when “big hit E, F” is reached, the big hit It becomes difficult for the sphere to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If the first special symbol wins, it will be one of the “big hits A to C”. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, there is a high possibility that the “special symbol probable change state” and the “normal symbol short-time state” will occur. On the other hand, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, it will be one of “big hits D to F”. Furthermore, although mentioned later for details, the ratio which becomes "big hit D" when it is a big win in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is 5%. Therefore, if you win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, it will be “big jackpot E, F” with a high probability (95% ratio), so “low probability state of special symbol” that is disadvantageous for the player after the jackpot ends There is a high possibility that the “normal state of normal symbols” will be obtained. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous for the player compared to the lottery of the first special symbol.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball that has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres), is indicated by the lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the jackpot type (a special symbol corresponding to the big hit A to F) (First symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize), a change display of a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 7 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is constituted by imitating numbers from “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the upper 4/5 is the main display area Dm that displays the 3rd symbol variably, and the others. The lower 1/5 is a sub display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls, the notice character, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 0.5 seconds. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (0.5 seconds or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is It is possible to suppress overlooking whether or not it is a big hit. Also, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to a detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stop display. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time. Further, when both a holding ball corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol and a holding ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are present, the lottery based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is preferential. Executed.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to have a ball entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). There are many cases in which the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm, and a sphere that has not yet been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of (reserved balls), is displayed by the number of reserved symbols indicating each reserved ball.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 7B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a maximum of four reserved symbols displayed as black circles are displayed on the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. The reserved symbol displayed on the right side of the front view is the reserved symbol (first reserved symbol) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol, and the reserved symbol displayed on the right side of the front view corresponds to the lottery of the second special symbol. This is a reserved symbol (second reserved symbol). FIG. 7B illustrates an example in which three first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank). Yes.

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is equal to the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, the symbol “O” as the symbol “2” and the symbol “×” are displayed. Fluctuation display in which symbols are alternately turned on is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is only for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is limited to 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. The first entrance 64 is provided with a pair of electric accessories 64a that can be opened and closed on the left and right sides. When the electric accessory 64a is in an open state, the first entrance 64 is vertically above the first entrance 64. In addition to the sphere that has flowed down from the sphere, a sphere that has flowed down from the left-right direction can also enter. The first entrance 64 is a sphere (left-handed sphere) that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 regardless of whether or not the electric accessory 64a is open. On the other hand, nails or the like are arranged so that it is easier to enter the ball than the ball that flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (a right-handed ball).

  A second entrance 640 into which a sphere can enter is disposed on the upper right side of the first entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters. As the second entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13 as shown in FIG. However, it is easier to enter the ball than the ball that has flowed down the flow path provided in the left direction of the variable display device unit 80.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally long specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until seven balls have been won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. It should be noted that the specific winning opening 65a and the second entrance 640 are positions where a ball (right-handed ball) that has flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 can enter (easy to enter). Is arranged. In other words, the sphere that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 is disposed at a position where it cannot enter (difficult to enter). Therefore, in order to receive a payout of a prize ball during a jackpot (to obtain a profit), the player has only to hit the ball to the right.

  A plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which a sphere can pass are provided inside the variable winning device 65 (see FIGS. 6A and 6B). The sphere that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 flows down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge channel 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 to which a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is given after a big hit by passing a sphere. The special discharge flow path 65e2 can pass only in the first round of jackpot. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to easily enter the ball into the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot (the door 65f1 is opened for 30 seconds at the maximum). (Big hits A to D) and big hits (big hits E and F) are difficult (the open / close door 65f1 is opened only for a maximum of 0.2 seconds) to enter the specific winning opening 65a. .

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 4-6, the structure of this variable prize-winning apparatus 65 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65 b that protrudes from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65 b, so that the variable winning device 65 is A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The LED board 65d is disposed, a back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and an open / close door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The open / close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, the back cover body 65e, and the flow path cover body A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by 5g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, and a back surface that is disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. The cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, and covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and in an inaccessible state. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to roll on the upper portion of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, in the open state of the open / close door 65f1, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65. You can win in 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a La-La cross-sectional view shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 to be described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Discharged.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the probability change state of the special symbol by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Probability game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  As described above, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game balls that won the specific winning slot 65a during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The operation of the switching member 65h is linked to the first round of jackpot, and the switching member 65h operates at a position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is opened simultaneously with the start of the first round of jackpot, while the jackpot Simultaneously with the end of the first round, the switching member 65h operates to a position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed. Further, the time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 0.2 seconds at the shortest. Yes. As described above, at jackpots E and F, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 is 0.2 seconds at the maximum, so unless the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a at the same time. The special discharge channel 65e2 is closed by the guide piece 65h2 before the ball flows into the special discharge channel 65e2. For this reason, when the big hits E and F are reached, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit of one.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the opening of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a ball discharge port switch 65e4 formed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined from the sum of the ball outlet switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be detected early.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, 11 for each ball prize). Award balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A substantially semicircular sorting member 660 is provided on the upper right side of the variable winning device 65 in front view. The sorting member 660 is provided with receiving portions on the left and right sides that can receive the balls flowing down from above. The distribution member 660 has two arrangements, one in which the right-side receiving part comes directly under the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 and the other in which the left-side receiving part comes directly under the flow path. A street arrangement may be taken. FIG. 2 illustrates an arrangement in which the right-side receiving part comes directly under the flow path.

  In a state where the right receiving part is arranged immediately below the flow path, when the sphere flowing down the flow path is received by the right receiving part, the sorting member 660 is caused by the weight of the sphere. As a result of rotating in the clockwise direction, the left-side receiving part is arranged directly below the flow path. Further, since the right receiving portion is inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front due to the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, the distribution member 660 flows down in the lower right direction. The sphere that has flowed down to the lower right of the sorting member 660 rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 along the flow path. For this reason, when the open / close door 65f1 is set to the open state, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a.

  In a state where the left receiving portion is arranged immediately below the flow path, when the sphere flowing down the flow path is received by the left receiving portion, the distribution member 660 is caused by the weight of the sphere. As a result of rotating in the counterclockwise direction, the right-side receiving part is arranged directly below the flow path. Further, since the left receiving portion is inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front by the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, the sorting member 660 flows down in the lower left direction. The sphere that has flowed down in the lower left direction of the sorting member 660 flows along the flow path toward the second entrance 640, and about 80% of the sphere enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the ball (right-handed ball) launched into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is directed to the variable winning device 65 by the distribution member 660. And the direction of the second entrance 640 are alternately distributed. For this reason, in the special game state (big hit), if a right-handed strike is made in order to win the ball to the specific winning opening 65a to obtain a winning ball, the ball will enter the second winning slot 640 during the big hit. Enter a lot. As a result, in most cases, when the jackpot ends, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is stored up to a value (4).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit type (big hit E, F) that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 has a high probability (95%). It is determined. The jackpots E and F are both configured so that the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in each round is extremely short (0.2 seconds), making it difficult to enter the ball during the jackpot. Therefore, if the big special is won by lottery of the second special symbol, it becomes a big hit type with a high probability (95%) and hardly winning a winning ball, and also the gaming state after the big hit is disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to execute the lottery of the first special symbol as much as possible, because the lottery of the second special symbol is an undesirable lottery.

  However, as described above, if the player hits the right to win the winning ball by winning the ball to the specific winning opening 65a in the jackpot, the ball also enters the second winning slot 640, so at least the jackpot After the end, the lottery of the second special symbol held during the jackpot is executed. Therefore, after the big hit, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which a game is played in the hope that the special symbol lottery will not be a big hit until there is no reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol. As expected by the player, if all of the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are missed, the player can make the lottery of the first special symbol only by left-handed. The game can be continued without reducing the number of balls until it is a relatively advantageous type of jackpot (jackpot A to C).

  In the first embodiment, when one ball enters the second entrance 640, one prize ball is awarded. When a right strike is made, one ball is distributed to two balls in the direction of the second entrance 640 by the sorting member 660, so that all balls distributed in the direction of the second entrance 640 are second. Even if the ball enters the entrance 640, only half of the ball hit by the right hand is paid out by the winning ball. Therefore, since the ball is easily reduced when the right hand is made, it is possible to eliminate the merit with respect to the right hand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn during normal times (a state other than the big hit).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, if a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big win is over, it is disadvantageous for the player, and all the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are removed. If so, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game by paying attention to a predetermined number (4 times) of lottery results after the jackpot ends, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any prize opening is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the characteristic effects of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment executed in the main display area Dm will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player hits the right for the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot, the second special symbol is displayed until the jackpot is finished by the ball entering the second entrance 640. Is configured to reach the upper limit number. If a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it will be disadvantageous to the player, so the player plays the game in the hope that the lottery will be lost during the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. In the first embodiment, whether or not a lottery result that is a big hit of the second special symbol is included in the holding ball until all the change display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is finished. It is set as the structure which performs the production | presentation which suggests.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B, an effect performed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during jackpot. As shown in FIG. 8A, during the jackpot, the effect that the adventurer 811 searches for the cave is displayed. In addition, on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally elongated display area HR1 is displayed. In this display area HR1, the current number of rounds is displayed. In the example of FIG. 8A, the characters “1 round” are displayed, indicating that the current is the first round.

  On the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally elongated display area HR2 having a substantially rectangular shape is displayed. In the display area HR2, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry to the specific prize opening 65a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 8A, the characters “GET 0022” are displayed in the display area HR2, and 22 prize balls have been paid out (that is, two balls have been identified since the big hit has started). It is shown that the ball entered the winning opening 65a.

  In addition, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, four display areas HR3a to HR3d are displayed. Although details will be described later, in these four display areas HR3a to HR3d, the degree of expectation of the reserved ball of the second special symbol increased by the ball entering the second entrance 640 during the big hit is shown. An image is displayed. Note that, as described above, it is more likely that a player who is out of the lottery of the second special symbol will have a better result for the player than a big hit. An image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed.

  FIG. 8A illustrates a state in which there is no reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, and each display region HR3a to HR3d is marked with a “?” Symbol. An image is displayed.

  FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected during the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 8B, when a ball entering the second ball slot 640 is detected during the jackpot, an effect is provided in which the adventurer 811 finds the treasure chest 812. This treasure box contains a key 813, and the mode of the key 813 suggests an expectation that the lottery result of the second special symbol held on the basis of the incoming ball will be lost. The more gorgeous aspect of the key 813, the higher the degree of expectation of detachment, and the poorer the aspect, the lower the degree of expectation of detachment (the higher the risk of winning in the lottery of the second special symbol).

  FIG. 8B illustrates a case where a normal mode key 813 is displayed. When the adventurer 811 finds the key 813, the key in the same mode as the discovered mode is displayed on the upper side with respect to the display area where “?” Is displayed among the display areas HR3a to HR3d. It is displayed in order from the area. The example of FIG. 8B illustrates a case where the image of the key 813 is displayed in the display area HR3a among the display areas in which the symbol “?” Is displayed. In this way, by displaying the mode of each key 813 discovered by the adventurer 811 on the display areas HR3a to HR3d, the variable display based on each held ball executed after the current jackpot is completed. The player can confirm the degree of expectation at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, dedicated display areas HR3a to HR3d for displaying the expected degree of the reserved ball of the second special symbol are provided for the main display area Dm. There is no need to provide an area. For example, it is good also as a structure which displays the holding | maintenance symbol of the 2nd special symbol displayed on the sub display area | region Ds in the aspect of the key which the adventurer 811 discovered.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the ending effect after all the big hit rounds are completed. In the first embodiment, from the jackpot ending period until the fluctuation time of all the variable displays based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol elapses, the jackpot E, An effect of notifying the player whether or not F exists is executed. In other words, it is suggested whether or not the gaming state remains in the “special symbol probable change state” and the “normal symbol time-short state” even after all the variation display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is finished. Production for this is executed. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the “special symbol probability change state” and the “normal symbol time-short state”, which are game states advantageous to the player, are referred to as “probability change mode” and are disadvantageous to the player. A special game state “low probability state of special symbol” and “normal state of normal symbol” are referred to as “normal mode”.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot ending period is started, an effect that the adventurer 811 finds the door 814 is performed. In addition, a display region HR4 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is formed above the image of the door 814. In the display area HR4, characters “Start door break mode !!!! Break through the four doors !!” are displayed. With these display contents, it is advantageous for the player if the four doors can be opened using the four keys (displayed in the display areas HR3a to HR3d) collected during the jackpot (the holding ball of the second special symbol). It is possible to make the player easily understand that the probability variation mode continues even after digesting. In the upper left display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, a left-pointing arrow image and a character “left-handed” are displayed. With these displays, it is possible to cause the player to launch a sphere in the left direction (to cause a sphere to be launched into the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80).

  The reason for notifying left-handed at the start of the ending period is to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being executed after the end of the jackpot. In other words, the ball launched by the player hitting the right during the ending period is the second entrance 640 after the jackpot is finished (and the change based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started). To prevent the number of lotteries for the second special symbol from increasing after the jackpot is over (the lottery for the second special symbol will be executed beyond the four times reserved during the jackpot) (To suppress). As described above, even if a big win is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the winning ball cannot be almost obtained during the big win, and the game state after the big win becomes a normal mode which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, as the number of lotteries for the second special symbol increases, the player becomes disadvantageous. For this reason, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the player from making a right turn even after the jackpot ends and a new ball entering the second entrance 640, the game is played from the ending period. It is set as the structure which alert | reports left strike to a person. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot can be limited to the one with the holding ball of the second special symbol held during the jackpot, which is excessively disadvantageous for the player. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  When the jackpot (special game state) ends with the end of the ending period, an effect of breaking through the door 814 using the keys collected during the jackpot is executed as shown in FIG. 9B. FIG. 9B illustrates a case where the adventurer 811 succeeds in breaking through the door 814 using the key displayed in the display area HR3a. If the breakthrough is successful, an image in which the door 814 is opened is displayed, and characters “breakthrough !!” are displayed in the display area HR4. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the remaining three doors are broken through, the player is in an advantageous state (probability change mode).

  The effect of breaking through the door 814 is basically executed in conjunction with the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. That is, the effect that the adventurer 811 opens (breaks through) the first door using the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR3a) is based on the first reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is executed in a period from when the variable display is started until the variable display based on the second reserved ball is started. Similarly, the effect that the adventurer 811 uses the second key to open the second door is that the display of the variation based on the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is started, It is executed in a period until the variable display based on the holding ball is started. The effect that the adventurer 811 uses the third key to open the third door is the fourth special ball after the variable display based on the third reserved ball of the second special symbol is started. It is executed in a period until the variable display based on the start. The effect of opening the fourth door using the fourth key is executed in the variation display variation time based on the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol. In addition, these are the operations when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the detachment, and if the big special is won by lottery, the door breaks through during the jackpot period The production is performed one or more times.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, it is difficult to detect whether or not the second special symbol is a big hit from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the variable winning device 65. As described above, when the second special symbol comes off, the disengagement (so-called “small hit”) with the opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 is determined. And the opening period (0.2 seconds) of the door 65f1 in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the door 65f1 in each round in the case of a big hit E, F in the second special symbol lottery Match. Further, when the jackpot is E or F, the interval period between rounds is made to coincide with the variation time (1 second) when the second special symbol lottery is missed. By configuring in this way, even if a big hit E or a big hit F occurs during execution of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the present is already a big hit from the opening period and opening interval of the door 65f1. It can be difficult to determine whether or not. Thereby, attention can be paid to the end of a series of effects (door breakthrough mode effects) executed at the start of the ending period.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when the door breakthrough mode effect fails to break through the fourth door. That is, it is a figure showing an example of a display mode when either of big hits E and F is included in the holding ball of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 10 (a), when the adventurer 811 fails to break through the door, the characters "failure ..." are displayed in the display area HR4 and the adventurer 811 possesses it. The effect that the key is broken is executed. By these display modes, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the probability variation mode has ended (either of the jackpots E or F has been won).

  FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the door breakthrough mode effect is successful in breaking through the fourth door. In this case, an image in which the fourth door is opened is displayed, and characters “Great success!” And characters “Probability mode entry!” Are displayed in the display area HR4. By these display modes, it can be easily understood that the game can be performed in the probability variation mode advantageous to the player.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the above-described door breakthrough is performed over a period from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol increased during the jackpot. The mode production is executed. Due to this door break-through mode effect, the variation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol will be all off, and whether the game can be played in the probability variation mode, jackpot E, F is included in the retention ball, in the probability variation mode It is possible to suggest to the player whether or not the player falls into the normal mode without drawing the first special symbol. By adopting a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over an ending period and a plurality of variable displays after jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the first embodiment, the game after all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are finished depending on whether or not the number of doors corresponding to the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be broken. Although it was set as the structure which alert | reports whether a state is probability change mode, the production | presentation aspect is not restricted to this. Eventually, any of the two types of results (success, failure, victory, defeat, finalization, losing, etc.) may be used, for example, in an aspect where the adventurer 811 is an enemy. It is good also as a structure by which probability change mode is alert | reported if it fights and it wins an enemy.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a description will be given of the correspondence relationship between the change over time of the effect mode during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and the change over time of the state of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing state of the open / close door 65f1). FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the probability variation mode is notified (that is, when the lottery balls corresponding to the second special symbols all fall out). On the other hand, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the normal mode is notified (that is, when one of the big hits E and F is included in the hold).

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when it is informed that the mode has shifted to the probability change mode (when the lottery of the second special symbol is all out), the start screen for the door breakthrough mode effect (with the start of the ending period) ( 9 (a)) is displayed. This start screen continues to be displayed for the ending period of 1 second, and the start screen ends when the ending period ends and the jackpot end timing is reached. When the jackpot ends and the variable display based on the first reserved ball (hold 1) of the second special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, the effect of breaking through the first door (FIG. 9B) )) Is started. This effect continues until the start timing of the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball (hold 2). As described above, when the second special symbol is not selected, it is almost a small hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the fluctuation display for 1 second based on the hold 1 is completed, the small hit is started and the open / close door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. It is displayed that the door has been successfully broken in accordance with the opening period.

  Thereafter, similarly, the change display for 1 second and the opening / closing of the door 65f1 for 0.2 seconds based on the small hit are repeated. In accordance with this, an effect of breaking through the second to fourth doors is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and it is notified (displayed) that the door has been broken through during each opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1. . In this way, the door is broken through for a one-second fluctuation period by notifying the result of whether or not the door can break through during the small hitting opening period after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The expectation for can be further increased. In addition, since it is possible to draw attention during the small hitting period, it is difficult for the player to make an attempt to determine whether or not the hitting pattern has already been reached based on the opening pattern of the door 65f1. it can.

  After the adventurer 811 breaks through the door 814 and is informed of the transition to the probability change mode (after the fourth small hit ends), the display mode dedicated to the probability change mode is an effect that breaks through the fourth door. (Not shown) is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the mode has changed to the probability changing mode.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a case where the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is a big hit F. FIG. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode effect, when it is informed that the mode has shifted to the normal mode (when either the big hit E or F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol), the ending period At the same time, the door break mode production will start. When the jackpot is over and the special symbol variation display based on the first reserved ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, an effect of trying to break through the first door is executed, and the small hitting opening period At the same time, the adventurer 811 breaks through the first door.

  When the change display of the special symbol based on the second reserved ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, an effect of trying to break through the second door is executed. At this time, the fluctuation display for 1 second is executed based on the second reserved ball, and the jackpot F is started after 1 second has elapsed. When the big hit F is reached and the first round is started, the open / close door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. It is notified that the adventurer 811 has succeeded in breaking through the door in accordance with the opening period. Then, with the start of the interval period after the end of the first round, an effect is made to break through the third door, and the opening period of the second round after the interval period of 1 second has elapsed (0.2 Second), it is informed that the third door has been successfully broken through.

  In addition, when the interval period after the end of the second round is started, an effect of trying to break through the fourth door is executed, and the third round opening period (0. It is informed that the fourth door could not be broken through (for 2 seconds) (see FIG. 10A).

  After it is notified that the door breakthrough has failed, a result display (not shown) indicating the total number of winning balls paid out in this probability variation mode is executed until the end of the jackpot. When the jackpot ends, the display mode is set to the normal mode.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the variable display is sequentially performed based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the big hit, the state of the state of the opening / closing door 65f1 when the variable display and the small hit are repeated is time-lapsed. The change (see FIG. 11 (a)) and the temporal change (see FIG. 11 (b)) of the state of the open / close door 65f1 when the big special ball E or F is included in the holding ball of the second special symbol are at least It is configured to match until the end of the door break mode production. That is, the opening period of the door 65f1 in each round of big hits E and F is configured to be 0.2 seconds, which is the same period as the small hitting opening period. In addition, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of jackpots E, F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the variation time in the variation display of the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, even if any of the first to fourth reserved balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode effect ends The operation of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the probability variation mode is notified (see FIG. 11A). Therefore, since it can be difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot E or F has been reached from the operation of the open / close door 65f1, it is possible to focus attention on the door breakthrough mode effect to the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, in FIG.11 (b), even if it becomes a big hit F with the 2nd reservation ball (it falls to normal mode), the mode which breaks through to the 3rd door and fails by the 4th door is illustrated. However, it may be configured such that an effect that fails to break through the door is executed when either of the big hits E and F is changed during digestion of the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 17) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 17, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol And a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 36). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball opening 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640, respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process). It is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first random number counter When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state), and a high probability (special The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each of them is set differently (see FIG. 13B). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number falls outside the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random numbers “0-3” are the first per random number for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see FIG. 13B). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 4 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/100”. In addition, as shown in FIG.13 (b), the random value (counter value) used as a jackpot is common in the lottery of the 1st special symbol, and the lottery of the 2nd special symbol. On the other hand, random number values other than the above-mentioned jackpot random number value correspond to deviations. As described above, the special symbol removal includes a small hit. As shown in FIG. 13B, the random numbers that are missed by the lottery of the first special symbol at the low probability of the special symbol are 396 numbers “4 to 399”. On the other hand, 37 random numbers of “3 to 40” are lost in the lottery of the second special symbol, and random numbers that are small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol are “41 to 399”. 359 pieces.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 40 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 39” are stored in the first random number table for the high probability ( (See FIG. 13 (a)). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 40 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/10”. In addition, when the special symbol is highly probable, the random number values that are out of the lottery of the first special symbol are 360 numbers of “40 to 399”. On the other hand, only “40” is specified as the random number value that is lost in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number value that is a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is “359” of “41 to 399”. Individuals are defined.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), when the first special symbol lottery is won and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9”, the big hit type is “big hit A” ( 16 rounds probable big hit). The jackpot type when the value is “10 to 89” is “Big Jack B” (5-round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is “90 to 99” is “Big Jack C”. (2 rounds probable big hit).

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4” in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit type is “big hit D” (16 rounds probable big hit). The jackpot type when the value is “5-49” is “Big Jack E” (7 round normal jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is “50-99” is “Big Jack F”. (6 rounds are usually big hits).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that six types of hits (big hits A to F) are determined based on the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. In other words, even if the jackpot type is determined, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. The above-mentioned “probability jackpot” means a jackpot of a type in which the ball easily passes through the probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and “normal jackpot” means a jackpot of a type in which the ball does not easily pass through the probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Means.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and back off” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth off” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 15A) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 15 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 15A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d is a special figure 1 per table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) as a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol. And at least a special figure 1 out (normal) table 202d2 (see FIG. 15C) and a special figure 1 out (probability) table 202d3 (see FIG. 15D). In addition, as a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the second special symbol, a table 202d4 (see FIG. 16 (a)) for special figure 2 (4 fluctuations or less) and a special pattern 2 (5 fluctuations or more) ) Table 202d5 (see FIG. 16 (b)), special figure 2 off (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 (see FIG. 16 (c)), and special figure 2 off (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d7 (FIG. 16). 16 (d)) at least.

  First, with reference to FIG. 15B, the special figure 1 per table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table 1 table 202d1. The special chart 1 per table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. Each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1 in the special chart 1 table 202d1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with variation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is associated with various types of super reach. Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns are associated with the range of “180 to 198”. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the special figure 1 table 202d1.

  FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of place in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set. Set (reach out of front / rear, reach out of front / rear).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for outreach, various types of outreach normal reach (30 seconds) are in the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 “0 to 149” (30 seconds), and out of superreach are in the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), “198” is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation acquired from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the special symbol probability variation state. In the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from the above-described variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. If within the range of “90 to 99”, the detachment reach (rear-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d4 for the special figure 2 (4 variations or less). This special figure 2 per table (4 variations or less) table 202d4 is selected when the special symbol variation count is 4 times or less after the jackpot is over, and when the second special symbol lottery is a lottery It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be defined is defined. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 or less after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern has a short fluctuation per one second as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Selected.

  FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d5 for the special figure 2 (5 variations or more). This special figure 2 per table (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d5 is selected when the special symbol variation count is 5 times or more after the big hit is finished, and when the second special symbol lottery is a big prize. It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be defined is defined. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), after the big hit, when the number of changes of the special symbol is 5 or more, regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1, the change pattern has a long change per change time of 300 seconds. Selected.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6. This special figure 2 off (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 indicates that, after the big hit is finished, the special symbol fluctuation count is 4 or less, and the second special symbol lottery is off (including a small hit). It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when it becomes. As shown in FIG. 16 (c), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 or less after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation time of 1 second as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Selected.

  FIG. 16D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d7. This special figure 2 per table (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d7 is out of the special symbol lottery (including small hits) when the special symbol fluctuation number is 5 or more after the big hit is over. It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected in this case is defined. As shown in FIG. 16B, after the big hit, when the number of changes of the special symbol is 5 or more, regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1, the change pattern has a change time of 300 seconds and a long change occurs. Selected.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, after the big hit, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the number of executions of the special symbol variation display is 4 times or less, the lottery result is lost (small hit) 1) is always set as the variation time regardless of whether it is a big hit or not. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot E or F has been reached from the fluctuation time during the execution of the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the jackpot. That is, it can be made difficult to determine from the variation time whether or not the game state after the variation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is all in the probability variation mode. Therefore, a player who wants to know whether or not to enter the probability variation mode can be caused to play a game by paying attention to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect, so that the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, after the big hit, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the number of executions of the special symbol variation display is 5 times or more, the variation time is set regardless of the lottery result. The configuration is always set to 300 seconds. As a result, if the player makes a right-hand hit in a state other than the big hit, a special symbol lottery can be executed only once every 300 seconds (5 minutes) (very low game efficiency). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from making a right strike in a state other than the big hit. If a right-handed strike is made in a state other than the jackpot, especially in the probability variation mode, only the second special symbol lottery is executed. There is an extremely high possibility of becoming. In other words, there is a high possibility that the player can hardly win a prize ball and that the player will fall into the normal mode after the jackpot. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player will be dissatisfied with the game due to the disadvantageous normal mode without being able to fully enjoy the game in the advantageous probability changing mode.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, since the game efficiency when the player hits the right in a state other than the big hit, the player can be prevented from making the right hit in a state other than the big hit. Therefore, the game in the probability variation mode can be more enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by a second random number table 202c (see FIG. 14B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit when it matches the value of the winning random number set by the second random number table. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 14B). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (b), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the value is "5-28". In this manner, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 while the total number of random number values is 240, so the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In FIG. 5, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the obtained value of the second random number counter C4 is within the range of “5-28”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second As a symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 64a is opened only once for "0.2 sec. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “O” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 64a is opened “one second × three times”. Is done. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the opening period of the electric accessory 64a is further shortened. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a is released only “three times per second” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 36), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 35) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is immediately input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as a part of the fixed value data described above. ing.

  The first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 3” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 13B), and it is determined that the first special symbol is out of place. “4 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be determined (see 202a2 in FIG. 13B). Further, “3 to 40” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 13B), and the determination value determined as the small hit of the second special symbol “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 13B). Further, in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol, “0 to 39” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a4 in FIG. 13B), “40 to 399” is defined as a range of determination values to be determined (see 202a5 in FIG. 13B). Further, “40” is defined as a determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a5 in FIG. 13B), and “41 to 399 as determination values determined as small hits in the second special symbol. Is defined (see 202a6 in FIG. 13B). When the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning matches with one of the determination values corresponding to the jackpot defined in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) It is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14A) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2 is performed. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), “first jackpot A” is defined in association with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 14A). This “big hit A” is a big hit with 16 rounds. Among the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). The “big hit A” is opened until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes 30 seconds or until seven balls are won in each big hit round. Therefore, since the player continues to make a right strike in each round, the upper limit number (seven balls) can be awarded to the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have passed. When the jackpot is A, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. In addition, if the player continues to make a right turn in one round in which the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) can pass, the ball almost certainly passes the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, after the “big hit A” is completed, the probability variation mode is almost certainly achieved. As described above, “big hit A” is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probability variation mode.

  With respect to the first special symbol, a range of “10 to 89” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit B” (see 202b2 in FIG. 14A). . This “big hit B” is a big hit with 5 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 80 counter values that become “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 80% (80/100). This “big hit B”, like “big hit A”, is opened until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes for 30 seconds or until seven balls are won in each big hit round. Therefore, as with the jackpot A, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. In addition, in the first round of jackpot, since the ball almost certainly passes the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change mode is almost certainly set after the “big hit B” is completed. In this manner, since the number of rounds is smaller than “big hit A” (and “big hit D”, which will be described later), the number of winning balls that can be obtained is smaller than “big hit A” (and “big hit D”). However, many prize balls can be paid out. In addition, since the gaming state after the big hit becomes the probability changing mode, the game state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state for the player after the big hit like the “big hit A”.

  For the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit C” in the range of “90 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 14A). . This “big hit C” is a big hit with two rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). The “big hit C”, like “big hit A” and “big hit B”, is opened until the open / close door 65f1 passes 30 seconds or until seven balls are won in each big hit round. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as “big hit A” and “big hit B”. In addition, in the first round of jackpot, since the ball almost certainly passes the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change mode is almost certainly set after the “big hit C” is completed. In this way, since the “big hit C” has the smallest number of rounds, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is small, but the prize balls can be paid out, so that the player can have more balls. Further, since the gaming state after the jackpot is in the probability changing mode, the game state is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player after the jackpot, similarly to the “jackpot A” and “jackpot B”.

  In this way, if you win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, you can receive payouts of 2 to 16 rounds of prize balls, and the gaming state after the jackpot is almost certainly in the probability change mode, Regardless of which jackpot type is used, it is advantageous for the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14A, for the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 4” is defined in association with “big hit D”. (See 202b4 in FIG. 14A). This “big hit D” is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that become “big hit D”. The ratio is 5% (5/100). Since the “big hit D” has the same operation as the “big hit A”, it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous for the player, like the “big hit A”.

  For the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit E” in the range of “5 to 49” (see 202b5 in FIG. 14A). . This “big hit E” is a big hit with seven rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 45 counter values that become “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 45% (45/100). This “big hit E” is opened until the open / close door 65f1 passes 0.2 seconds or seven balls are won in each big hit round. Therefore, it is difficult to make one ball enter the specific winning opening 65a in each round, so that almost no winning ball can be obtained. Further, since it becomes difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a in the first round, there is almost no possibility that the ball will pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 in the first round. Therefore, the gaming state after the “big hit E” is ended is a “normal mode” which is almost disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, the “big hit E” is a disadvantageous hit type for the player because it is very likely that the player can hardly get a winning ball and shift to the “normal mode” which is disadvantageous after the big hit.

  For the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit F” in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b6 in FIG. 14A). . This “big hit F” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit F”, so “big hit F” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This “big hit F”, like “big hit E”, is opened until the open / close door 65f1 passes 0.2 seconds or until seven balls win in each round of big hit. Therefore, as in the case of “big hit E”, there is almost no prize ball, and there is an extremely high possibility of shifting to the “normal mode” which is disadvantageous after the big hit, so this is a big hit type that is disadvantageous for the player.

  In this way, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is highly probable (95% rate) that a winning ball cannot be almost obtained and the gaming state after the big hit is almost certainly in the normal mode. , F is likely to be disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it can be expected that the player can expect all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol, which have been increased by the balls entering the second entrance 640 during the jackpot, to come off. Innovative gameplay can be provided.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14B) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, “5-28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 14B). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 14B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second per-random number table 202c are referred to. It is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol.

  The variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is a data table in which determination values of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode are defined for each display mode. Note that details of the variation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, remaining ball timer flag 203k, remaining ball timer 203m, probability variation valid flag 203n , A probability variation valid timer 203o, a discharge number counter 203p, a fluctuation time counter 203q, a big hit / medium flag 203r, a small hit / medium flag 203s, a round end flag 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area ( Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b has four reservation areas. Each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the 2nd entrance 640 is memorized in this 2nd special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, which is the same as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved area having the area number one smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 28).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 28, FIG. 30). (See S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is held in the actual variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of held balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and displays a hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls whenever the number of held balls changes. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 28). Similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 32).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 of FIG. 33: No). ).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (probability variation mode). If the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (probability variation mode). If the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (normal mode). Further, as described above, in the probability variation mode, the normal symbol is in a short time state. Thus, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in a certain variation state and that the normal symbol is in a short time state.

  The initial value of the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF. When the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when the jackpot ends (see S1302 in FIG. 39). The probability variation flag 203g is reset to OFF when the big hit game is started (see S219 in FIG. 28).

  This probability variation flag 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 29). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S213), the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if it is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a for high probability. If the flag 203g is OFF, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the low probability first random number table 202a.

  In addition, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short time state in the normal symbol variation process (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 32). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to in the normal symbol variation processing, and if the probability variation flag 203g is on, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per random number table 202c for high probability. On the other hand (see S609 in FIG. 32), if the probability variation flag 203g is off, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per-random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 32). In the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a when the normal symbol is hit (S614 in FIG. 32). (See S620).

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability changing state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the probability changing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the big hit game. Here, when the sphere passes the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1416 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1304 in FIG. 39). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, the pachinko machine 10 is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. It is also possible to configure such that 203h is officially set to ON and returned. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to discriminate fraudulent situations in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is turned on and the power is turned on again in a state where the power is turned off, thereby reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of jackpot). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203p described later. This probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1415 in FIG. 40). Further, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1511 in FIG. 41). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, one is added and updated (S1403 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (total value of the discharging number counter 203p and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are equal. After it is determined whether it is correct, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S1511 in FIG. 41). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball throwing period after one round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, it means that it is a ball throwing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203m, which will be described later, is added and updated by 1 (see S1505 in FIG. 41). The remaining ball timer 203m is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time required for discharging the ball in the variable winning device 65 has elapsed. It is a counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203m is the time required for the game balls won in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the preset round 1 ends and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether or not elapses. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 0.5 seconds. In this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the remaining ball timer. It is set as an upper limit of 203 m. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203m has reached the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 matches the number of discharging prizes. (S1507 in FIG. 41). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, it is possible to suppress illegally leaving the ball in the variable winning device 65 illegally and causing the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 in anticipation of the timing of the first round of jackpot E or jackpot F.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probable state is provided improperly.

  The probability variation valid flag 203n is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203n is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is switched based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203o is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation valid flag 203n described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203o, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds. Thereafter, even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  Thereby, after the switching member 65h closes the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, or from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud in which a game ball is pushed up by a line or the like and passed, or a magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by radio waves or the like.

  The discharged number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharged number counter 203p is reset to 0 which is an initial value after it is determined that the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls (S1511 in FIG. 41).

  The fluctuation time counter 203q is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. In the variation time counter 203q, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202d is set (see S311 in FIG. 29). Also, this variation time counter 203q is decremented by 1 in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) (see S214 in FIG. 28), and whether the variation time has elapsed based on the value of this variation time counter 203q. Determined.

  The jackpot flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203r is on, it means that the jackpot is being hit, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not being hit. The jackpot flag 203r is a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, and is set to ON when the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1103 in FIG. 37). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 39). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the big hit flag 203r is referred to and it is determined whether or not the big hit is being made (see S201 in FIG. 28).

  The small hitting flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is in progress. If the small hitting flag 203s is on, it means that a small hit is being made, and if it is off, it means that the small hit is not being made. The small hitting flag 203r is a small hit in the special symbol lottery, and is set to ON when the small hit is started (see S1603 in FIG. 42). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S1610 in FIG. 42). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the small hitting flag 203s is referred to and it is determined whether or not the small hitting is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 28).

  The round end flag 203t is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball throwing period after the big hit round ends. If the round end flag 203t is on, it indicates that the ball is off after the round, and if it is off, it indicates that the ball is off.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags. By performing the control with reference to these flags and counters, it is possible to realize the novel gameability described above, in which a game is played in the hope that the second special symbol holding ball will come off.

  Next, referring to FIG. 19, a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described. explain. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is roughly divided into three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, the door breakthrough mode shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, and the probability change mode shown in the lower part of FIG.

  As described above, the normal mode indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of a big hit is low, and it is difficult for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. It becomes the most unfavorable gaming state for the player. In addition, as described above, the probability variation mode indicates the probability variation state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol, and the jackpot probability is high, and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

  In addition, the door break-through mode indicates a state in which there is a second special symbol holding ball acquired during execution of a probabilistic jackpot (hits A to D), and all lotteries based on the second special symbol holding ball are missed. Then, this is a state indicating that the game can be performed in an advantageous probability variation mode. This door breakthrough mode is the same state as the probability variation mode except that there is a holding ball of the second special symbol. That is, there is a high probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery (1/10), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 easily. Since the percentage of all the 2nd special symbol reserve balls accumulated during the big hits is about 65.6% (9/10 to the fourth power), the door breakthrough mode is at a rate of 65.6%. It can be said that the probability variation mode can be expected.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, there is a possibility that a transition from the normal mode to another mode is possible only in the case of a big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the first special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to C), and if the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round, the mode shifts to the door breakthrough mode after the big hit ends. . As described above, in the jackpots A to C, the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 by simply making a right turn in one round. If the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V is not won) due to the player not hitting the ball, etc., the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode again. Is done.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, the door breakthrough mode is shifted to another mode when not only a big win but also when all the change displays based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol are completed. That is, as shown in FIG. 19, when the variation display based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols is finished in the door breakthrough mode, the mode changes to the probability variation mode.

  In addition, when the big hit D determined at a rate of 5% in the case of the big win in the second special symbol lottery, the ball almost passes through the probability change switch 65e3, so the door breakthrough mode is again performed after the big win. Migrate to If the player does not strike the ball, etc., and the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V is not won), the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. . On the other hand, if the jackpot E or jackpot F is determined at a ratio of 95% when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the ball is moved to the special winning opening 65a in the first round. Since it is difficult to enter the ball, the ball hardly passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19, after the big hits E and F are finished, the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 19, the transition from the probability variation mode to another mode is performed only when the jackpot is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, if the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (big hit A to C), if the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round, the door breakthrough mode is entered after the big win ends. Transition. Each of the jackpots A to C is a jackpot type that allows a ball to easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, the mode is almost shifted to the door breakthrough mode. If the player does not strike the ball, etc., and the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V is not won), the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. .

  As described above, in the first embodiment, by going back and forth between the three modes, the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot is all missed. Thus, it is possible to realize a characteristic game characteristic that a game can be performed in an advantageous probability change mode. In a general pachinko machine, it is a favorable event for a player to make a big hit again in the hold (so-called holding in the hold) after the big win ends, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, It is possible to give an advantage to the player in the hope that no recreational resort will occur. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a novel gameability different from that of a general pachinko machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a are opened and closed. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid or a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a sub variable time counter 223f, a breakthrough effect counter 223g, a game state storage area 223h, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area composed of one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Yes. Each area stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main controller 110 up to four times. The symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reservation ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter. At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls for variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110, a special symbol When the change display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. The ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4208 in FIG. 46). In this way, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In addition, in order to notify the display controller 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display controller 114. Send to.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the second special hold ball number counter 223b. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223 of the main controller 110. The value is changed in synchronization with 203e. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It is possible to change while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4802 in FIG. 52). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4807 in FIG. 52). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The sub change time counter 223f is a counter that counts the change time of the special symbol change display. When a variation pattern command is received from main controller 110, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is set in sub variation time counter 223f.

  The breakthrough effect counter 223g is a counter that indicates the number of remaining doors to break through before changing to the probability change mode in the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Based on the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect has ended.

  The game state storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. This game state storage area 223h is updated every time a status command is output from the main controller 110 every time a change occurs in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (see S4210 in FIG. 46). Note that the gaming state storage area 223h is configured by, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not the normal symbol is in the short state, and the least significant bit indicates whether or not the special symbol is in a probable state. Therefore, in the “normal mode”, the lower 2 bits are “00B”, while in the “door breakthrough mode” and the “probability change mode”, the lower 2 bits are “11B”. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, an elapsed time timer for measuring the production time, and the like. doing. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 53) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image for displaying a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 53).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 22 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display controller 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the main power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 22, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. The “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 22 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player started playing while the main image was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the power was turned on, and the entrance was detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22B and 22C are alternately displayed. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If an incoming ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the hour main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 23B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” and the rear surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the back image corresponding to each of the back surfaces A and B is prepared in the character ROM 234 as an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the rear surface type is determined and the stage is changed to “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the position between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sand stage as the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “sand beach stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” has only a part of the rear surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIG. 23A to FIG. 23B). ) And image data corresponding to an image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or an image between FIGS. 23A and 23B) is displayed as a rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the ten main symbols (see FIG. 7) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Accordingly, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “adventurer” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. When the control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The back surface type is either a back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”), or a back surface different from the back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies, as the drawing target, the back image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A and B when the back surface type is specified to display either the back surface A or B. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 24). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 25 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 25).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 53). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 64B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 55B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 55 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 64A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 55 (b) ) (See step S6303)), pointer update processing (see step S7205 in FIG. 61) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 26), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 26, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 55 (b) Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 61). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 65). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 65). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 66).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 55B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 399, 99, 99, 239) are reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether either the big hit / medium flag 203r or the small hit / medium flag 203s is ON. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is neither big hit nor small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display holding based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired. (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

  After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol holding-ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number) Fluctuation display hold count N1) based on lottery is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209).

  In the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The held ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S209), and the process goes to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q (S214). Based on the value of 203q, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has passed (S215). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time counter 203q updated in the process of S214 has become zero. The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. One of the jackpots A to F is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. When the green LED is turned on and the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S219), the special symbol jackpot start is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. To do. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S219, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and an opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), the processes of S219 and S220 are skipped and the process proceeds to S221.

  The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the gaming state included in the state command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and includes the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed on the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, a first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, the probability variation flag 203g is read, and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probability variation state (S302). In the processing of S302, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the probability of the special symbol is changed, and if the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol has a low probability state (not the probability variation state). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state (S302: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with a first per-random number table (see FIG. 13B) for high probability. As described above, as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbols, 40 values of “0 to 39” are set, and the values of the first random number counter C1 and the random numbers that are the hits thereof coincide with each other. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variation state (the special symbol has a low probability state) (S302: No), the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. And a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, “0 to 39”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14A) to determine what the jackpot type is. To do. As mentioned above, if the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0-9”, the big hit A (16 rounds probable big hit) If it is determined that it is in the range of “10 to 89”, it is determined that the jackpot is B (5-round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of “90 to 99”, it is a jackpot C (2 rounds probability variation jackpot). Determination is made (see FIG. 14A). On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the jackpot D (16 rounds probable big hit), If it is in the range of “5-49”, it is determined that it is jackpot E (7 round normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “50-99”, it is determined that it is jackpot F (6 round normal jackpot) ( FIG. 14 (a)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to F). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A to F) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( (Variation time).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (including small hits) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 203q (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 36). When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 27), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first and second entrances 64 and 640. This is a process for executing a hold process of values indicated by various counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  If the ball has not won the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or the ball has won the first entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d. If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the processing of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the second entrance 640 (S407). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S401, the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S409).

  If there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S411, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are It stores in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203e is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S413, a prefetch process for prefetching the success / failure from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S413), and this process is terminated. Details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). In the pre-reading process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 has been detected in the current start winning process (see FIG. 30). (S501) If a new incoming ball is not detected (S501: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that a new ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (ie, 4). (S502: Yes), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), whether or not the timing for starting the variable display based on the incoming ball is in the special symbol probable state. Is determined (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the current game state is in a probable change state according to the current game state and the result of pre-reading the reserved ball held before the current entry. Specifically, if the jackpot is not included in the holding ball, the current gaming state coincides with the timing at which the fluctuation display based on the currently detected ball starts, so that the current gaming state is a probable state. It is determined that In addition, when the jackpot is included in the holding ball, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, when the probable jackpot is on hold, the system shifts to a probable change state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is held, the system shifts to a normal state after the jackpot. Taking these into account, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the fluctuation display based on the currently detected incoming ball is in a state of probability variation.

  In the processing of S503, when it is determined that the start of the variation based on the detected entry this time is the special symbol probability variation state (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance that detected the entry and the high probability The lottery result based on the current entry is acquired based on the first per-random number table (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start time is in the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), based on the type of the entrance that detected the entrance and the first per random number table for the low probability time The lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

  In the process of S506 executed after the process of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that detected the current entry and the lottery result obtained in the process of S504 or S505. (S506) This process is terminated. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance and the lottery result notified by the winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the normal symbol (second symbol) variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 or the first entrance port. 64 is a process for controlling the opening time or the like of the electric accessory 64 a attached to 64.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device 83 is in the middle of the display showing the hit and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (S608). Note that, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the period during which the special symbol is prone to change is coincident with the period during which the normal symbol is in the short-time state. Therefore, in the processing of S608, if the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short time state, and if it is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S608: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, the random number table for the normal symbol for high probability, Based on the result, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 14B).

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table for normal symbols for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of 0 to 4, 29 to 239, it is normal. It is determined that the symbol is off (see FIG. 14B).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S611: Yes), The display mode for winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short time state (whether the probability variation flag 203g is on) (S614). If the normal symbol is in the short time state (S614: Yes), the second symbol display device 83 displays the change. Is set to 3 seconds (S615), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time-short state (that is, the probability variation flag 203g is off) (S614: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S616), the process is terminated.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is discriminated (S617). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S615 or the processing of S616 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S617, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S617 (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 62) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win when the second symbol display device 83 starts the variation display being executed. Is determined (S619). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in a short time state (that is, whether the probability variation flag 203g is on) (S620), and the short time state. If it is not in the middle (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 are set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time” (S621), and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S523. On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in short time (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 are set to “1 second × “Twice” is set (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

  In the process of S623, the opening time determined in the process of S621 or S622 and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening are set (S623), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S621 or S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value 203M of 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S914 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S914 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S915, S916) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S915, S916) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the process of S916 is completed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the process of S910 is completed, the probability variation flag 203g is read (S911), and a state command is set based on the state of the read probability variation flag 203g. This state command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the current gaming state. After the process of S912 is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1009 and S1010 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 27) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) or the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the gaming state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the gaming state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each jackpot round, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has passed or the ball has won the specified number. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1004 is completed, next, in the small win state, a small hit control process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1005). In the small hit control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened at the start of the small hit, and it is determined whether the maximum open time has elapsed during the small hit opening period or whether a predetermined number of balls have won. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of this small hitting control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1005 is finished, next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1007). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 29), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 29). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the processing of S515 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 32) or the processing of S516, the second symbol display device 83 is set. The variable display is started at. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display device 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a normal symbol (2nd symbol) alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S512 or the processing of S513 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010). ) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1010: No), the time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the next main processing execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value (both 399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 34 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1009 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or the specific winning opening 65a. Is a process for opening or closing.

  In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), it is first determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) S220 is executed and the special symbol jackpot start is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1102). The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1102, the big hit medium flag 203r is set to ON (S1103), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1001 that the special symbol jackpot start timing is not reached (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1004, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1104: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105), and if it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes). ), A jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106), and this process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107). Specifically, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached when a special gaming state (all rounds of jackpots) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: Yes), an ending command is set (S1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1107 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1109). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1109: Yes), next, the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S1110), and this process is ended. To do. The details of the jackpot end process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1109: No), a winning process for performing a process according to winning a prize to the specific winning port 65a is executed (S1111). . The details of the winning process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After completion of the winning process (S1111), an abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has been normally discharged is executed (S1112), and this process is terminated. Details of this abnormality process (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1106). The jackpot operation setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds as described above.

  When the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) is started, first, the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S1201), and then it is determined whether it is the start timing of one round (S1202). If it is determined in the processing of S1202 that it is the start timing of one round (S1202: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1203), and the processing proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1202 that the current round is not the first round, the processing in step S1203 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1204. In the process of S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1204), and this process ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 (see S4404 in FIG. 48). Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be updated according to the number of jackpot rounds.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38), the special winning opening 65a can be opened in each jackpot round, and the special discharge channel 65e2 can be set to pass in the first round. it can. As a result, in the jackpots A to D, the player hits the right hand in the first round, and the ball almost certainly passes the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the probability change mode (the probability change state of the special symbol, and , Normal symbol time-short state). In the case of jackpots E and F, although the flow path solenoid (probability varying solenoid) 65k is set to ON in the first round, as described above, the opening period of the open / close door 65f1 is extremely short (0.2 seconds), Since it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during one round, the possibility that the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 is almost zero. Therefore, when the jackpot is E or F, the normal mode can be set after the jackpot. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol in which one of the types of jackpots A to C is determined in the case of a jackpot is determined as a lottery advantageous to the player, and a high probability (95% The lottery of the second special symbol in which one of the big hits E and F is determined by the ratio) can be a lottery disadvantageous for the player.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S1110). This jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end.

  In the jackpot end process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1301). If it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1301: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Then, the state after the big hit is set to the probability change mode (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1303. Since the probability variation flag 203g is reset to OFF at the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 28), the probability variation flag 203g is turned off after the jackpot by skipping the processing of S1302. That is, the normal mode is set after the jackpot.

  In the process of S1303, a state command is set based on the state of the probability change flag 203g (S1303). The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the gaming state storage area 223h in accordance with the gaming state notified by the state command. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped. Next, the big hit medium flag 203r and the probability variation setting flag 203h are both set to OFF (S1304), and this process ends.

  By executing the jackpot end process (see FIG. 39), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40, the details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port 65a.

  In this winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S1401). Here, the round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. If it is not the round effective period in the process of S1401 (S1401: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the present is the round effective period (S1401: Yes), it is then determined whether a winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1402), and the specific winning opening 65a is determined. If a winning is detected (S1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning at the specific winning opening 65a is detected is set. (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the winning at the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 and S1404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1405.

  In the process of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405). If the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has passed (S1406), and if the round time has passed. (S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. In the processing of S1406, if the current big hit is a big hit A to D, it is determined that the round time has passed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, and if the big hit is E or F, the start of the round is determined. It is determined that the round time has passed when 0.2 seconds have passed.

  In the process of S1407, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and a closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether or not the closing of the specific prize opening 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S1409). If it is determined that the closing is based on the end of one round (S1409: Yes), the flow path solenoid (Probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to OFF (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, when it is determined that the closing of the specific prize opening 65a this time is the closing due to the completion of a round other than one round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is turned on. Therefore, the process of S1410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the probability variation valid flag 203n, and the round end flag 203t are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. If it is determined in the process of S1405 that the value of the winning number counter is 6 or less (S1405: No), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), S1407 Step S1411 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1412.

  In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag 203t is on (S1412). If the round end flag 203t is off (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1412 that the round end flag 203t is on (S1412: Yes), it is then determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203n is on (S1416). In the process of S1416, if the probability variation valid flag 203n is off (S1416: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203n is on (S1416: No), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o (S1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is an upper limit value ( S1418). If the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1413, where the probability variation switch 65e3 is monitored and the probability variation setting flag 203h is updated. Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203o is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation state can be set in consideration of the time of sphere removal. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being imparted by illegally passing the sphere through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203n and the round end flag 203t are set to off (S1419), and the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is reset (S1420). ), This process is terminated.

  In the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1413). If the sphere has not passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1413: No), the process proceeds to S1414. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i (S1414), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1413). Exit.

  Next, the abnormality process (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormal process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has been discharged normally. Process.

  In the abnormality process (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round effective period (S1501). If it is not the round effective period (S1501: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the round effective period (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1502).

  In the process of S1502, if it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203p (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the sphere has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203k is off (S1504: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504: Yes), since the ball is being thrown, 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203m and updated (S1505). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining sphere timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506). If the value of the remaining sphere timer 203m is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then the number of discharges (the total value of the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203p) is won. It is determined whether the number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

  In the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of discharged items does not match the number of winning prizes (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of illegally causing the ball to enter the special discharge flow path 65e2 and passing the probability variation switch 54e3 during the period when the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of discharged items matches the number of winning prizes (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1509. In the processing of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is reset (S1510). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203p, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S1511), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 41), there is a problem that a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is not normally discharged due to a clogged ball inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. Detection and notification can be made early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, details of the small hitting control process (S1005) will be described. As described above, the small winning control process is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the small winning state.

  In this small hitting control process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not it is a small hitting start timing (S1601). An opening command indicating the winning opening is set (S1602), the small hitting / medium flag 203s is set to ON (S1603), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, if it is determined that it is not the small hit start timing (S1601: No), then it is determined whether it is a small hit (S1604), and if it is determined that it is not a small hit (S1604). : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1604 that a small hit is being made (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a based on the fact that the small hit is made ( If it is the start timing of the opening operation (S1605) (S1605: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (opening of the open / close door 65f1) is set (S1606), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1605 that it is not the start timing of the opening operation (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607), and if it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607: Yes), an ending command indicating that the small hitting ending period has started is set (S1608), and this process ends.

  Also, in the processing of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1607: No), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit end timing (S1609). (S1609: Yes), the small hitting medium flag 203s is set to OFF (S1610), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1609 that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), a small hitting medium winning process for determining the end of the small hitting release period is executed (S1611). The details of the small winning medium winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the small winning medium winning process (S1611) is completed, an abnormal process for determining the coincidence between the number of balls awarded to the specific prize opening 65a and the number of discharged balls is executed (S1612), and this process is terminated. To do. Since this abnormal process (S1612) is the same process as the abnormal process (see FIG. 41) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), its details are omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, details of the small hitting medium winning process (S1611) for determining the end of the small hitting opening period will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the small win / medium winning process (S1611). In the small winning medium winning process (S1611), first, it is determined whether or not it is during the small winning round effective period (S1701), and when it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S1701: No), The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the period is the effective period of the round (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not a ball winning at the specific winning opening 65a has been detected (S1702), and a ball winning is detected. If it is determined (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1702 that no winning for the specific winning opening 65a has been detected (S1702: No), the process of S1703 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1704.

  In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704). If it is less than 7 (S1704: No), then the round time (0.2 seconds) has elapsed. It is determined whether it has been done (S1705). In the process of S1705, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1705: No), this process is ended as it is in order to continue the small hit release period. On the other hand, in the process of S1704, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704: Yes), and when it is determined that the round time has elapsed in the process of S1705 (S1705: Yes). Since it means that the end condition of the small winning opening period is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S1706), and this processing is ended.

  Note that it is almost impossible to win 7 or more balls into the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds, which is the round time of the small hit. After the winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds, the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 52, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S4116 is performed by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 45). ) Is determined during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 45), it executes a power-off process in S4116. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S4116 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1616, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

  In the process of S4002, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S4116, This was started by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  In the process of S4005, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set ( S4006), the process proceeds to S4008. By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, if a reading / writing check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 in the processing of S4005 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4116 is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 45). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S4008. This is a case after the power failure has occurred and started in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  After the process of S4010, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 analyzes the state command notification content set in the startup process (see FIG. 31) (S4011), and according to the analysis result, the game state storage area 223h Is updated (S4012). Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped since the power is turned on. After the processing of S4012, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S4008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the processes of S4010 to S4013 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S4009 is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is reached via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes in S4102 to S4110. In step S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S4102 to S4110 are mainly processes related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4102 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later is set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S4107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S4108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S4110 ends, the process proceeds to S4111. In the process of S4111, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S4111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If it is determined in the process of S4113 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S4113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are set to ON (S4115), and the power interruption is performed. The process is executed (S4116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination processing (S4111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S4201). If it is determined in step S4201 that a variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S4203), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4204). When the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206). The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4204 that a stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), it is then determined whether a pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4207). . If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Value (the number N1 of the variable display hold based on the first special symbol lottery) or the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold based on the second special symbol) is extracted. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4208). In the processing of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is set. . After the process of S4208 ends, this process ends.

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the process of S08. The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are affected by noise and the like, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 is changed. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 are detected at the time of detection of the start winning prize or at the time of lottery of the special symbol even if it deviates from the value of 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S4208 is executed, the display hold ball for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol hold ball counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball counter 223c. A number command is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4207, if it is determined that a pending ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is then determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). If it is determined that a state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the gaming state storage area 223h is updated according to the received command (S4210). That is, when the probability change mode is notified based on the information according to the gaming state notified by the state command (whether or not the probability changing state), the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223h are set to “11B”. On the other hand, when the normal mode is notified, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223h are set to “00B”. Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4209 that no status command has been received (S4209: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S4211). If it is determined in the process of S4211 that a prize information command has been received (S4211: Yes), a prize information command process for performing control according to the pre-read result of the new start prize notified by the prize information command is executed. In step S4212, the process ends. Details of the winning information command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that no winning information command has been received (S4211: No), then whether a command related to jackpot (opening command, round number command, or ending command) has been received. Is determined (S4213). If it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has been received (S4213: Yes), the jackpot related processing for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S4214). The process ends. Details of the jackpot related processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4213 that a command related to the jackpot has not been received (S4213: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4215), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S4215, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the above-described winning information command processing (S4212) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the winning information command process (S4212).

  In the winning information command processing (see FIG. 47), firstly, information notified by the received winning command (information indicating the type of the winning entrance where the new start winning is detected and the lottery result) is received in the winning information storage area 223a. (S4301). When the processing of S4301 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the winning information of the second special symbol is notified by the current winning information command (S4302). In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the information notified this time is not the winning information of the second special symbol (the winning information of the first special symbol) (S4302: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current winning information is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpots A to D are currently being executed (S4303). If it is determined that any one of A to D is being executed (S4303: Yes), then it is determined whether it is during the ending period (S4304). Selects the mode of the key 813 in the effect of finding the key 813 (see FIG. 8B) (S4305). In the processing of S4305, if the current winning information is winning information corresponding to a lottery result that is out of play (small hit), the ratio of selecting the gorgeous mode key 813 increases, and the current winning information becomes the big hit E, F If the winning information corresponds to, the ratio of selecting a poor key 813 is high. When the process of S4305 ends, an effect for finding the key 813 of the aspect selected in the process of S4305 is set (S4306), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4303 that the jackpots A to D are not being executed (S4303: No), and in the process of S4304, it is determined that the jackpots A to D are in the ending period (S4304: Yes). As a result of the player making a right turn during the period in which the player should make a left turn, it means that a start winning for the second entrance 640 has been detected. The warning effect for informing the person is executed (S4307), and this process is terminated. This warning effect (not shown) is more strongly left-handed to the player than the “left-handed” character and left-pointing arrow image displayed on the display area HR1 during execution of the door break-through mode effect. The effect of the mode instructing is executed. Specifically, for example, while the character “left-handed” is displayed large on the entire display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, an effect that the voice “please return to left-handed” repeatedly flows at the maximum volume is executed. Is done. By executing this warning effect, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from making a right-hand hit in a situation other than during the execution of jackpots A to D. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player continues to make a right turn during the normal mode or the probability change mode, and the lottery of the disadvantageous second special symbol is continuously executed.

  By executing this winning information command process, the mode of the key 813 to be found during the jackpot can be appropriately set based on the new winning information of the second special symbol. Therefore, during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the player can predict the expectation level of the probability change mode based on the mode of the key 813, so that the player's game during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect is performed. Can improve interest in

  In the first embodiment, the selection ratio of the mode of the key 813 is variable depending on whether or not the winning information of the second special symbol notified by the newly winning information command is out (small hit). The configuration of the key 813 is selected based not only on the winning information based on the new winning information command but also on the winning information of the second special symbol already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Also good. Specifically, for example, prior to receiving the current winning information command, winning information corresponding to one of the jackpots E and F is included in the winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. If it is included, the ratio of selecting the key 813 in a poor state may be high regardless of the lottery result of the current winning information. By configuring in this way, as the poor 812 key 813 continues, there is a higher possibility that jackpot E, F is included in the second special symbol holding ball, so that the player It can be estimated more accurately whether or not the jackpot E, F is included in the holding ball. Also, for example, when all of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a before receiving the current winning information command and the current winning information command is out (small), the selection ratio is It may be configured to provide a mode (for example, a mode of the diamond key 813) that becomes higher (or selected only in this case). By comprising in this way, when the said aspect is displayed, the sense of expectation with respect to shifting to probability change mode can be raised more.

  In the first embodiment, when a winning information command corresponding to the second entrance 640 is received outside the execution period of jackpots A to D, the warning effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. Even when a new ball entering the second ball slot 640 is detected in a state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit value, a warning effect is executed if it is outside the execution period of jackpots A to D. It is good also as a structure. In particular, during the ending of jackpots A to D or during the execution of the first variation display, the possibility that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit is extremely high. In such a case, if the player is making a right turn, the second special symbol lottery may be executed five or more times after the big win due to a new start winning for the second entrance 640. There is a risk that the player may lose. On the other hand, when the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the player loses by configuring the warning effect. Can be suppressed (prevented).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the jackpot related process (S4214) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related processing (S4214).

  In the jackpot related process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4401). If an opening command has been received (S4401: Yes), a display opening command is set (S4402). The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for informing the start of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81. When the processing of S4402 ends, the big jackpot related processing (see FIG. 48) ends. If the opening command of this time is a command corresponding to one of the big hits E, F, or the small hit, and the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed, the door breakthrough mode is executed. The production continues. In this case, it is good also as a structure which does not output an opening command itself with respect to the display control apparatus 114, and it is discriminate | determined by the display control apparatus 114 side whether the door break-through mode effect is being performed, and an effect mode is selected. It is good also as composition to do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4401 that an opening command has not been received (S4401: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4403). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S4403: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S4404), and a display round number command is set according to the extracted round number. (S4405). The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S4405, this process ends. As in the case of receiving the opening command, the door breakthrough mode effect is continued as it is when the start timing of a new round of jackpots E and F occurs during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the round number command has not been received (S4403: No), it is then determined whether or not a close command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4406). If it is determined that a close command has been received (S4406: Yes), a close command process for performing control according to the situation in which the close command has been received is executed (S4406), and this process ends. Details of the closing command process (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4405 that the close command has not been received (S4405: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S4407). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4407: Yes), ending command processing for performing control according to the type and status of the ending command is executed (S4408), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4407 that an ending command has not been received (S4407: No), this process ends. By executing the jackpot related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the above-described closing command process (S4406) will be described. In this closing command process (S4406), first, it is determined whether the type of jackpot being executed is any of jackpots A to D (S4501). S4501: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is other than jackpots A to D (either jackpot E or F) (S4501: No), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is a value greater than zero. (That is, whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed), and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed). ) (S4502: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4502: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S4503). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after subtraction has become 0 (that is, whether it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect) (S4504). In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 1 or more (S4504: No), this process is ended as it is to continue the door breakthrough mode effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after subtraction has become 0 (S4504: Yes), this means that it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, so the remaining period until the end of the jackpot is reached. The result display is set (S4505), and this process is terminated. The result display indicates the display contents for displaying the total number of winning balls paid out by repeating the jackpot and the probability variation mode, the number of jackpots, and the like on the third symbol display device 81. By setting this result display, it is possible to easily grasp the number of jackpots won by the player, the number of winning balls acquired, and the like, so that the player can have a sense of achievement.

  Next, the details of the above-described ending command process (S4408) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This ending command process (S4408) is a process for performing control according to the jackpot type, game situation, etc., when an ending command is received as described above.

  In this ending command process, first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an ending command indicating a small hitting ending (S4601). If it is determined that the command is a small hitting ending (S4601: Yes), The small hit control process for performing the control in accordance with the timing of ending is executed (S4602), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4601 that the ending is not a jackpot ending (S4601: No), the current ending command is output to notify that the jackpot ending engine has started. Therefore, it is determined whether the jackpot being executed is any of jackpots A to D (S4603).

  In the process of S4603, when it is determined that the big hit being executed is not any of the big hits A to D (S4603: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is any of jackpots A to D (S4603: Yes), the winning information of the second special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S4604), and the read winning is read. It is determined whether or not the jackpot D is included in the lottery result of the reserved ball of the second special symbol indicated by the information. As described above, the jackpot D is the only advantageous jackpot type in which a large number of award balls can be obtained and the probability variation mode is set almost after the jackpot, among the jackpots of the second special symbol.

  In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the jackpot D is included in the hold (S4605: Yes), the door breakthrough mode in a special mode that is notified that the jackpot has been hit during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. An effect is set (S4606), and this process ends. As described above, after the jackpots A to D are completed, it is advantageous for the player if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are basically removed. This is because if a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it will be one of the disadvantageous big hits E and F with a high probability (ratio of 95%). However, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, there may be a big hit D that is advantageous to the player with a low probability (a proportion of 5%). In this case, a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and the door breakthrough mode effect is set again after the big hit, which is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the big hit E, F is achieved. Therefore, in this case, it is configured so that the player can easily understand that the jackpot D has been set by setting a door breaking mode effect in a special notification mode.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the big hit D is not included in the holding ball of the second special symbol (S4605: No), 4 is set to the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S4607), Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol (S4608). In the process of S4608, if it is determined that the jackpot is included, it means either the jackpot E or F during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and it means that it shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot ends. Finally, the door breakthrough mode effect in the form of notifying the fall to the normal mode (the form of failing to break through the door) is set (S4609), and the process is terminated. In addition, as the production time of the door break mode production, the same production time of 5.8 seconds is set regardless of whether or not the jackpot is included. During this 5.8 seconds, when all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hits), it is between the start of the ending engine and the end of the small hits based on the fourth reserved ball. It is a period. That is, in order to make it difficult for the player to guess whether there is a big hit in the holding ball from the production time, the production time of the door breakthrough mode production is set to the same time (4.8 seconds) regardless of the result. .

  In the process of S4608, when it is determined that the big hit is not included in the holding ball (S4608: No), the door breakthrough mode effect in the form of finally informing the transition to the probability change mode is set (S4610). ), This process is terminated. By executing this ending command process (see FIG. 50), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the content of the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the above-described small hitting end process (S4602) will be described. This small hitting end process (S4602) is a process executed when it is determined that the received ending command is a small hitting ending command in the ending command process (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the small hit end process (see FIG. 51), first, whether or not the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0 (that is, whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed). (S4701), if the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (S4701: No), it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed, so this process is terminated as it is. Note that the case where the player makes a small hit outside the execution period of the door break mode production is a case where the player makes a right-hand hit outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D (period in which left-handing should be performed) due to intention or negligence. is there. In this case, when the start winning for the second entrance 640 is detected, the warning effect is set by the processing of S4307 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 47), so the player has already returned to the left. It is thought that there is. Therefore, control such as performing a warning effect again at the end of the small hit is not performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by repeating the warning effect in spite of returning to the left hand.

  In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (S4701: Yes), then, the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S4702), and the counter value after subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not (S4703). If it is determined in the processing of S4703 that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g has become 0 (S4703), the door breakthrough mode effect ends with a lottery result (ie, a small hit) (that is, all the door breakthrough mode effects in effect) Therefore, an effect mode indicating the entry into the probability variation mode is set (S4704), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4703, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is not 0 (1 or more) (S4703: No), this means that it is not the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, so this The process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4801: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S4806. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4802), and then S4803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46). In this process, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4803).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S4804). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4805), and the process proceeds to S4806. In the process of S4805, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area.

  In the process of S4806, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4806: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4807), and then the process of S1706 in the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In step S4808, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223. Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4808 (S4809), and this process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, and controls the third symbol display device 81 to display the stop of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 66, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply apparatus 115 to the display control apparatus 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 53). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 54, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 64A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 64A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 22 is drawn. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 55B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 55B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. 26 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, small hit, front / rear outreach reach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out completely) ) And the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 57B, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any one of big hits A to F, small hits, missed reach, completely missed) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned on. (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 58B, details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described. FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the rear image change command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command process, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. .

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either of the back A and B is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S7002 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S6414 that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6416). If this is the case (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and processing corresponding to each command, ie, variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 57 (b)) are performed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, the details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 61, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S7206 together with the warning image developed previously, and for each sprite, Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, and therefore a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 64A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 55B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) (see S7501: No in FIG. 64A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  In the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer processing, so this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed previously, and as a result, the process is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and a transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 26) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of the sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 55B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the position at which the ball can easily enter when left-handed (a game method in which a ball is launched toward the flow path on the left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front) is performed. If the first entrance 64 arranged at the right side and the right strike (a game method for launching a ball toward the flow path on the right side of the front view in the game board 13) are performed, the ball is easy to enter (left strike is performed) And a second entrance 640 disposed at a position where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter). If a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol that is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it will be disadvantageous for the player (almost no prize ball will be obtained during the big win) On the other hand, there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an unfavorable normal mode after the big hit). On the other hand, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, It is configured to increase the possibility that it will be advantageous to the player (a large amount of winning balls can be obtained at the jackpot and the mode is changed to a favorable variation mode after the jackpot). Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the lottery of the first special symbol which is more advantageous than the disadvantageous lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

  In addition, the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a that is opened during jackpot and a large number (11) of prize balls are paid out each time a ball enters. As with the second entrance 640, the specific winning opening 65a can be entered when the player makes a right strike (easy entry), and cannot enter the ball when placed left (difficult to enter). It is provided at the position. For this reason, in order to obtain a winning ball by winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot, it is necessary to hit the ball to the right. As described above, when the player hits the right side, the ball enters the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the big hit, the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be stored up to the upper limit. For this reason, after the jackpot is over, it is possible to form a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous when the jackpot is reached, can be continuously executed. A game can be performed in the hope that all of the symbols on the symbol are off (small hits). In other words, in a general pachinko machine, it is a favorable event for the player to become a big hit again in the hold after the jackpot end (so-called “holding in the hold”), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, It is possible to give an advantage to the player in the hope that there will be no on-hold consecutive resort. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a novel gameability different from that of a general pachinko machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Moreover, in this 1st Embodiment, whenever the reservation ball | bowl of a 2nd special symbol increases during execution of jackpot AD, the lottery result of the increase | reservation ball | bowl is prefetched, and the aspect according to the prefetch result is produced. Is configured to execute. In other words, an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result is out of place (small hit) is executed. More specifically, an effect is provided in which the adventurer 811 acquires the key 813 in a mode corresponding to the prefetch result of the increased reserved ball lottery result. With this effect, it is possible to cause the player to infer from the aspect of the displayed key 813 whether or not to shift to the probability change mode during the jackpot. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being simply an operation for obtaining a prize ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the jackpot game.

  Moreover, in this 1st Embodiment, from the ending period of jackpot AD to the fluctuation | variation time of all the variable displays based on the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol elapses, An effect of notifying the player whether or not the jackpot E, F exists is executed. In other words, even after all the change display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is finished, an effect for suggesting whether the gaming state remains in the probability change mode or falls into the normal mode is executed. . By adopting a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over an ending period and a plurality of variable displays after jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Moreover, in this 1st Embodiment, when it loses by the lottery of a 2nd special symbol, it is set as the structure which becomes a small hit with high probability. Then, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the open / close door 65f1 in each round of the big hits E and F are configured to be the same (0.2 seconds). Further, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of jackpots E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the variation time in the variation display of the second special symbol. . By configuring in this way, even if any of the first to fourth reserved balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode effect ends A series of opening / closing operations of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the probability variation mode is notified (when the holding balls of all the second special symbols are small hits). That is, as the operation of the open / close door 65f1 from the end of the jackpot to the end of the door breakthrough mode effect, regardless of whether the holding ball of the second special symbol includes the jackpots E and F. It is possible to unify the operation of repeating the closing for 1 second and the opening for 0.2 seconds four times. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether the opening / closing door 65f1 after the big hit ends is an opening / closing operation due to continuous small hits or an opening / closing operation due to the big hit E or F. The door breakthrough mode production can be noticed to the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the lottery of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a specification which can be performed in parallel with the fluctuation | variation display of a 1st special symbol, and the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to make a big win by the variable display of the first special symbol before the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is executed, so during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect , Can be left-active. In this case, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, a variation pattern having a long variation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 10%). . By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute the first special symbol lottery one or more times during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, so that the chance to become a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol Can be formed.

  In the first embodiment, the left-handed notification is made from the start of the ending period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the final round of jackpot, the remaining number of hits until the final round is displayed and the left-handed left ball is displayed. ”Or the like may be displayed so that the player can immediately switch to the left after the end condition of the final round is satisfied. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl enters into the 2nd entrance 640 after the end of jackpot.

  In the first embodiment, when the normal symbol is in a short time state, the normal symbol variation time is uniformly 3 seconds, and the opening period of the electric accessory 64a when the normal symbol is hit is 1 second × Although it was set as the structure set twice, it is not restricted to this. For example, after the jackpot is ended, only the first normal symbol variation time is set to a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the period until all variations based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol are completed. Good. By configuring in this way, since the normal symbol is not hit during the execution of the door break mode production, from the opening time of the normal symbol, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol It can be difficult to determine whether it has fallen or whether the normal symbol's time-short state is maintained. Therefore, the player can be paid attention by the result of the door break mode production.

  In the first embodiment, when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, it is configured to be almost a small hit, but is not limited to this. For example, if the second special symbol is out of place, instead of configuring it to be simply out of place, the variation time in the case of a big hit is varied according to the number of fluctuations after the big hit, and the door breakthrough mode The period from when the production starts until the big special jackpot of the second special symbol is started, and from when the door breakthrough mode production starts, until all the variable displays corresponding to the second special symbol release are completed. It is good also as a structure which makes a period (period until it transfers to probability change mode) correspond. More specifically, after a big hit, when the first special symbol lottery is won, the variable time is set to 4 seconds, and the second special symbol lottery is won. If the variation time is set to 3 seconds and the third special symbol lottery is won, the variation time is set to 2 seconds and the fourth second special symbol lottery is won. In this case, it may be configured such that one second is set as the variation time. By configuring in this way, 4 seconds (1 second × 4), which is the total of the variation time when all the four reserved balls of the second special symbol are missed, and a big hit on the way, The period until the jackpot is started (4 seconds) can be matched. Therefore, for 4 seconds after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the door breakthrough mode effect, even if the second special symbol jackpot is included in the holding ball, the specific winning opening 65a is not opened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that it can be determined whether or not the operation of the specific winning opening 65a shifts to the probability change mode before the door breakthrough mode effect ends. It should be noted that the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode effect until the start of the second special symbol jackpot is the variable display corresponding to the 4th miss of the second special symbol after the door breakthrough mode effect is started. As long as it is longer than the period until the end, the jackpot is not started at least during the execution of the door break mode production. Therefore, when the second special symbol is just a big hit, it may be configured to set a variation time equal to or greater than the sum of the variation times of the variable display corresponding to four times the second special symbol deviation.

  In this 1st Embodiment, it is comprised so that the opening period of the 1-4 special winning holes 65a in jackpots E and F may be the same (0.2 second) as the opening period of the specific winning holes 65a in small hits However, the player may arbitrarily determine the difference as long as it is indistinguishable whether it is a jackpot opening period or a small jackpot opening period based on the experience. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous and the lottery of the first special symbol is advantageous. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery of the second special symbol may be advantageous, and the lottery of the first special symbol may be advantageous. And if the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is a big hit, the door breakthrough mode production will produce an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door, and if the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is all off, the door breakthrough will fail You may comprise so that the production to perform may be performed. Thereby, if the door breakthrough is successful, it is possible to realize a more easily understandable gameplay such as a jackpot. Furthermore, in this case, the first entrance 64 may be deleted and only the second entrance 640 may be provided. That is, only the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed.

  In the first embodiment, while the variation based on the holding ball of the second special symbol after the big hit is being executed, it is difficult to understand whether the big special or the big hit was made in the lottery of the second special symbol. As described above, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set. However, it is not limited to the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol that makes it difficult to understand whether it is a big hit or a small win. For example, even in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot type for which the jackpot and the same action as the jackpot (the same action or an action that the player cannot distinguish from the jackpot) is set is determined. Good.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot ending period is started to determine whether or not all of the second special symbol held balls held during the jackpot are out of play (small hits) (whether to shift to the probability variation mode). From this, it is configured to be executed over a period until the lottery of all the second special symbols is completed, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports shifting to the probability change mode during an ending period in at least one part in the case of shifting to the probability change mode. That is, at the start of the ending period, the lottery result of the second special symbol holding ball is pre-read, and if it is determined that all the pre-read results are out of place (small hits), the probability will change during the jackpot ending period with a predetermined probability. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports transfer to a mode. By configuring in this way, the player can be notified more quickly of the transition to the probability variation mode, so that the player can be pleased. When notifying the transition to the probability change mode during the ending period, an effect that breaks through four doors may be executed at once, or an effect that is different from the normal door break mode effect is executed. Also good. Here, as an effect that is different from the normal door breakthrough mode effect, for example, an effect that the theme song of the adventurer 811 flows may be executed, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is blacked out. After that, it is possible to execute an effect in which the characters “confirmed probability change mode” appear on the display screen. Furthermore, when an effect that is determined to shift to the probability change mode is executed during the ending period, the effect is changed until the change based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol ends (that is, until the probability change mode is started). ) It may be configured to continue execution. By configuring in this way, the player who knows the transition to the probability change mode at an early stage (during the ending period), the transition to the probability change mode in the remaining period until the transition to the probability change mode. Can be immersed in the afterglow. Thus, the player can be satisfied.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports shifting to a probability change mode before an ending period. More specifically, when a start winning corresponding to the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected and the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated based on the winning information command. , It is determined whether or not all the winning information of the second special symbol is out (small hit). And when all the winning information is disapproved (small hit), it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation which shows the transfer to probability change mode at that time. As an effect indicating the transition to the probability change mode, for example, an effect that the adventurer 811 finds a special (premium) mode key 813 may be executed. For example, the display mode is normal, and the jackpot It is good also as a structure which changes the music which flows into a special (premium) thing.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the variable discharge device 65 is provided with the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, and the positive variation switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided during the jackpot. When the ball passes, the gaming state after the big hit is configured to be set to the probability variation mode. Further, as long as the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, the probability variation mode and the jackpot are repeated without limitation.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot is determined in advance for each jackpot type. In addition, it is configured so that an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive times of the probable variation state of the special symbol, and if the upper limit is reached, even after winning the probable large bonus, it is configured so that after the jackpot is set to a low probability state of the special symbol Yes.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, in order to prevent the player from making a right strike during normal times (a state other than the big hit), when the start winning for the second entrance 640 is detected during normal times It was set as the structure which performs warning production.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the electric accessory 640b is provided for the second entrance 640, and the ball enters the second entrance 640 while being normally blocked by the electric accessory 640b. It is configured to be difficult. In addition, during the big hit state, the second special is performed during the big hit like the first embodiment by controlling the electric accessory 640b provided along with the second entrance 640 to be easily opened. It is configured to store up to the maximum number of reserved balls of symbols. In addition, since the electric accessory 640b is provided in association with the second entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a provided in association with the first entrance 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. .

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the configuration is that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. This is a partial change. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 67, the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, a normal entrance (through gate) 67 is set in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, a variable winning device 650 and a second entrance 640 are provided on the downstream side of the normal entrance 67. The variable prize winning device 650 is provided in place of the variable prize winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and is used as a prize opening for paying 13 prize balls every time a ball wins a specific prize opening 650a of the variable prize winning device 650. It is configured. The special winning opening 650a is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can be entered (easy) and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter (difficult), and is opened in each jackpot round Set to state.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be variable between a closed position that prevents the ball from entering the second entrance 640 and an open position where the ball can enter, and FIG. 67 shows the open position. The case where it is variable is illustrated. Although details will be described later, this electric accessory 640a performs operation control so that the ball is easier to enter in the low probability state of the normal symbol than in the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol. Is called. More specifically, in the normal symbol high probability state, the normal symbol hit probability is slightly higher than the normal symbol low probability state (199/240 → 200/240), but the normal symbol variation time is longer. At the same time (3 seconds → 30 seconds), the opening period of the electric accessory 640b when the normal symbol is hit is shortened (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, the ball is less likely to enter the second entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol as a total. Therefore, in the probability variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 even if the player hits the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent the symbol lottery from being executed. In addition, during the big hit that is set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so it is possible to easily store up to the upper limit number of reserved balls during the big hit. .

  In addition, by attaching the electric accessory 640b to the second entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. A special figure 1 small winning device 655 is provided below the first entrance 64. The special figure 1 small winning prize device 655 is configured such that when the first special symbol lottery is won, the special figure 1 small winning prize opening 655a is set in an open state so that the ball is brought into the interior. You can enter the ball. In the second embodiment, when the probability variation mode is entered, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is greatly increased (1/1000 → 989/1000), and left-handed was performed during the probability variation mode. In this case, the number of balls to be consumed and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the special figure 1 bonus game winning hole 655a is made equal to the number of the first special symbols. It is configured. By comprising in this way, the game efficiency at the time of left-handing in probability change mode can be improved, without using the electrically-driven accessory 64a in 1st Embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the distribution member 660 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first embodiment is deleted, and the downstream side of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 The flow path is branched in approximately three directions. In other words, the flow path toward the second winning entrance 640, the flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and the out opening 66 without going to any of these (the second winning opening 640 and the specific winning opening 650a). It is branched to a flow path that flows down toward the side. By configuring in this way, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to cause a part of a ball launched with a right hit during the jackpot to aim at the specific winning opening 650a to enter the second entrance 640. it can. Therefore, it can be set as the structure which accumulate | stores the reservation ball | bowl of a 2nd special symbol to the upper limit number during jackpot. Thereby, also in this 2nd Embodiment, the novel game nature which wishes that all the lotteries based on the reservation ball of the 2nd special symbol performed after a big hit will be missed can be realized.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, a flow path toward the second entrance 640 by a plurality of nails, a flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and a flow path toward the out port 66 And form. Therefore, by adjusting the nail by the hall clerk, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the balls distributed to the second entrance 640 and the ratio of the balls allocated to the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, since the adjustment according to the management policy of the hall can be performed, a more convenient pachinko machine 10 can be realized.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the first random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 68 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202a in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68A, in the second embodiment, the range of values that the first hit type counter C1 can take is expanded to 0-999.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), “0-9” is defined as the range of determination values determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol (see 202a1 in FIG. 68 (a)). As in the first embodiment, the determination value that is a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Further, “10 to 998” is defined as a range of determination values determined to be out of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 68 (a)), and a determination value determined as small hit of the first special symbol “999” is defined as the range. In addition, “10, 11” is defined as a range of determination values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 68 (a)), and the determination value determined as small hit of the second special symbol “12 to 999” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 68 (a)).

  On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol, the range of the judgment value that is a big hit, the judgment value that is out of the range, and the range of the judgment value that is a small jackpot are all the first special symbol and the first special symbol. It is common to two special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), “0 to 10” is defined as the range of determination values determined to be jackpots (see 202a4 in FIG. 68 (a)), and determinations determined to be out of place. “11” is defined as the value (see 202a5 in FIG. 68 (a)), and “12 to 999” is defined as the determination value determined to be a small hit (see 202a6 in FIG. 68 (a)).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is different between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol. Then, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is extremely high. As a result, the number of balls to be consumed when left-handed in the probability variation mode and the first special symbol lottery will be a small hit, and the ball will enter the special figure 1 small winning prize opening 655a The number of prize balls to be paid out is configured to be equal. By comprising in this way, the game efficiency at the time of left-handing in probability change mode can be improved, without using the electrically-driven accessory 64a in 1st Embodiment.

  Note that the bonuses for the second special symbol and the bonuses for the first special symbol are different in the number of award balls that a player can obtain. It is configured to acquire a ball. On the other hand, in the small bonus of the second special symbol, as in the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 650a is opened only for 0.2 seconds, so that it is difficult for the player to win a prize ball. Therefore, if the player hits the ball rightward during normal times, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and an unfavorable jackpot type is easily determined even if the jackpot is won, and the winning ball is played even if the jackpot is hit. Since it can hardly be obtained, it is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of making a left-handed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn at normal times.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the second embodiment, three types of jackpots A2 to C2 are provided as jackpot types of the first special symbol, and jackpot D2 is set as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. , E2 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “0 to 9” is defined in association with “big hit A2”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 68 (b)). This “jackpot A2” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 16 and a probability change state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit A2”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery The ratio is 10% (10/100). The “big hit A” is released until the specific winning opening 650a has passed 30 seconds or six balls have been won in each big hit round. Therefore, since the player continues to make a right strike in each round, the upper limit number (six balls) can be awarded to the specific winning opening 650a before 30 seconds have passed. When the jackpot is A, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

  For the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined to be associated with “big hit B2” in the range of “10 to 69” (see 202b2 in FIG. 68B). . This “big jackpot B2” is a big jackpot in which the number of rounds is seven and a probability variation state of a special symbol is set after the big jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 60 counter values that become “big hit B2”, so “big hit B2” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 60% (60/100). As in the “big hit A2”, the “big hit B2” is released until 30 seconds have elapsed or six balls have been won in each round of the big hit. Therefore, similarly to the “big hit A2”, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

  For the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit C2” in the range of “70 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 68B). . This “big jackpot C2” is a big jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and a probability variation state of a special symbol is set after the big jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 30 counter values that become “big hit C2”. The ratio is 30% (30/100). As in the case of “big hit A2” or “big hit B2”, this “big hit C2” is released until 30 seconds have elapsed or six balls have been won in each round of big hit. . Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as “big hit A” and “big hit B”.

  In this way, if the first special symbol draws a big win, you can receive a payout of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, or 16 rounds, and the game state after the big win is almost certainly Therefore, even if it becomes any jackpot type, it becomes advantageous for the player. In addition, since the ratio of 7 rounds and 16 rounds having a relatively large number of rounds is determined (a ratio of 70%), when the first special symbol is a big hit, it is possible to expect a large amount of winning balls. Therefore, the player can be pleased when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 4” is defined in association with “big hit D2”. (See 202b4 in FIG. 68 (b)). This “jackpot D2” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is four and a probability change state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that are “big hit D2”, so “big hit D2” is determined when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. The ratio is 5% (5/100). The “big hit D2” is released until 30 seconds have passed in the special winning opening 650a or until six balls have been won in each big hit round. Therefore, it is possible to receive a relatively large amount of prize balls.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the second special symbol, the range of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 99” is defined in association with “big hit E2”. (See 202b5 in FIG. 68 (b)). This “jackpot E2” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is four and a probability change state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 95 counter values that will be “big hit E2”, so “big hit E2” is determined when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 95% (95/100). Unlike the other jackpot types, this “jackpot E2” is released until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or six balls have been won in each of the jackpot rounds. Since it is difficult to make a ball enter the specific winning opening 650a in 0.2 seconds, “Spot Bonus E2” is an unfavorable jackpot type in which a prize ball cannot be acquired. In addition, as described above, there is an upper limit (4 times) for the number of consecutive special symbol probabilities, and if the jackpot is reached when the upper limit has been reached, the gaming state after the jackpot is determined regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to be in a disadvantageous normal mode. Therefore, if it becomes “big hit E”, the winning ball cannot be obtained and the number of times until the normal mode is shifted is subtracted, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when a big win is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, a winning ball cannot be obtained with a high probability (ratio of 95%) and the remaining big hit until the normal mode is set. The jackpot type (jackpot E2) in which the number of times is reduced is determined. That is, as in the first embodiment, when the big win is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a high possibility that an unfavorable result will be obtained for the player. This realizes a novel gameability in which a game can be played in the hope that the lottery result will be lost during execution of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol after the jackpot ends. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, details of the second random number table 202c in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 69, in the normal state of the normal symbol, “5 to 203” is defined as the determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 69). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 69). In other words, the normal symbol (normal probability state) (low probability state) and the normal symbol high probability state are different from each other in the number of judgment values determined to be a normal symbol hit. As a result, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, the hit probability can be made substantially equal to the high probability state of the normal symbol.

  In addition, as described above, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes longer than that in the normal state of the normal symbol (3 seconds → 30 seconds), and the electric motor in the case of hitting the normal symbol The opening period of the accessory 640b is shortened (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, the ball is less likely to enter the second entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol as a total. Therefore, in the probability variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 even if the player hits the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent the symbol lottery from being executed. Thereby, it can suppress that the lottery of a 2nd special symbol will be performed in situations other than during execution of door break-through mode production, and it will become an excessive disadvantage for a player. In addition, during the big hit that is set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so it is possible to easily store up to the upper limit number of reserved balls during the big hit. .

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 202. As shown in FIG. 70, the configuration of the RAM 202 in the second embodiment is such that a probability variation limit counter 203aa and a breakthrough mode counter 203ab are added to the configuration of the RAM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18). Is different. Further, the difference is that the probability variation setting flag 203h, the probability variation passage counter 203i, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the remaining ball timer 203m, the probability variation valid flag 203n, the probability variation valid timer 203o, and the discharge number counter 203p are deleted.

  The probability variation limit counter 203aa is a counter that counts the remaining number of consecutive times of the probability variation state until the normal mode is set. When the normal mode is set as the state after the jackpot end, the probability variation limit counter 203aa is set to 4 which is the maximum number of consecutive times of the probability variation state (see S1314 in FIG. 78), and every time the probability variation jackpot ends. The value is subtracted by 1 (see S1311 in FIG. 78). When the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is updated to 0 at the end of the jackpot, the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends.

  The breakthrough mode counter 203ab is a counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set as a counter value at the end of jackpot A2 to D2 (see S1316 in FIG. 78). ) At the start of fluctuation, the value is updated by subtracting one by one (see S324 in FIG. 73). In the second embodiment, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab (the remaining number of changes until the door breakthrough mode effect ends) is included in the change pattern command and transmitted. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, it reads the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab from the fluctuation pattern command and grasps the remaining number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode effect ends. In particular, since the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up, if the power is cut off during the execution of the door break mode effect, the progress of the door break mode effect after the power recovery is controlled by the sound lamp. It becomes impossible to grasp on the device 113 side.

  In contrast, in the second embodiment, the information corresponding to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command and output to the sound lamp control device 113. Even if the power is shut off during execution and the stored contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are cleared, the door breakthrough mode effect is executed by analyzing the first received variation pattern command after the power is restored. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is in progress and its progress. Thereby, even when the power is shut off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the effect can be resumed from the continuation of the door breakthrough mode effect after the power is restored. Therefore, since it can suppress that the content of an effect changes before and after the interruption | blocking of a power supply, it can suppress that a player holds discomfort in the content of an effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a state transition method according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the three modes of the normal mode, the door breakthrough mode, and the probability change mode are switched. In the second embodiment, the content of the door breakthrough mode is changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, the door breakthrough mode of the first embodiment described above is a special symbol probable state, a normal symbol time-short state, and shows only a state in which a second special symbol holding ball is present. In addition to this, in the second embodiment, the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists is also set as the door breakthrough mode. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the door breakthrough mode in which the probability change state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol are set is referred to as a door breakthrough mode 1, and the low probability state of the special symbol, and The door breakthrough mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is referred to as a door breakthrough mode 2. The door breakthrough mode 1 is illustrated on the left side of the middle stage of FIG. 71, and the door breakthrough mode 2 is illustrated on the left side of the middle stage of FIG.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 71, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of transition to another state only when a big hit is made. Specifically, when a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery, the mode always shifts to the door breakthrough mode. As described above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the special prize opening 650a is opened for a relatively long time (maximum 30 seconds) in each round of the big prize, so aiming for the special prize opening 650a in order to win a prize ball When a ball is launched, a large amount of balls enter the second entrance 640. As a result, at the end of the jackpot, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are stored up to the upper limit value, and after the jackpot is the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1).

  As shown in the middle of FIG. 71, in the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough modes 1 and 2), the lottery of the second special symbol is basically a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, or the lottery of the second special symbol is all out of place. 2 When the number of reserved balls in the special symbol becomes 0, there is a possibility of shifting to another state. The state of the transition destination in the case of a big hit is common in the door breakthrough modes 1 and 2, but the transition destination state when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol becomes 0 is the door breakthrough mode 1 It differs in door breakthrough mode 2. Specifically, in the door breakthrough mode 1, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the probability variation mode (see the left side of the middle stage in FIG. 71). In the probability variation mode, by left-handed, it is possible to execute only the lottery of the first special symbol that is advantageous to the player, and the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol increases (for small hits) The winning opening 655a is easily opened), so that the game can be continued until the first special symbol is a big hit without substantially reducing the ball. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. On the other hand, in the door break-through mode 2, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without becoming a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the normal mode (see the middle right side of FIG. 71). In normal mode, the probability of hitting is low, so if you make a left-handed strike to execute the lottery of the first special symbol, the ball will continue to decrease until you win a big hit. Become.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 71, in the door breakthrough mode, when the big win is E2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, after the jackpot ends, on the condition that the continuous number of probability variation states has not reached the upper limit. Transition to probability change mode (common door break modes 1 and 2). As described above, the jackpot E2 has a short opening time of the specific winning opening 650a (0.2 seconds), and a winning ball cannot be obtained even if it is hit right. In addition, in the display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, the left hit is notified during the big hit E2 and during the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, unless the player deliberately makes a right strike against the notification, the reserved ball of the second special symbol will not be accumulated during the execution of the jackpot E2, so the mode shifts directly to the probability change mode after the jackpot E2 ends. To do. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa that counts the number of times the remaining probability variation state continues until the normal mode is entered. Therefore, when the jackpot E2 is reached, the winning ball cannot be obtained, and the number of probability variation states is subtracted, resulting in an unfavorable result for the player. For this reason, when the specific winning opening 650a repeats the opening operation for 0.2 seconds a plurality of times in the door break-through mode, the player wants that all the opening operations are due to the small hit of the second special symbol. Innovative gameplay can be realized.

  In addition, when the door breakthrough mode results in a big hit E2 of the second special symbol and the probability variation limit counter 203aa has become 0 (the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has reached the upper limit), the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Because it is not possible, the state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode effect, the effect of a mode that fails to break through the door is executed to notify the transition to the normal mode.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 71, when the jackpot D2 is won during the door breakthrough mode, the door breakthrough mode (either the door breakthrough mode 1 or the door breakthrough mode 2) is again performed after the jackpot D2 ends. Migrate to More specifically, if the continuous number of probability variation states has not reached the upper limit, door break mode 1 (special symbol probability variation state and normal symbol time-short state) is set, and the probability variation state continuous number of times is the upper limit. If it has reached, the door breakthrough mode 2 (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) is set. As described above, when the door breakthrough mode 1 is set, it is advantageous for the player because it can shift to the probability change mode if the winning ball with the second special symbol does not win. On the other hand, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is set, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), it falls to the normal mode, so it is advantageous to make a big hit. .

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the probability variation mode, when a special symbol wins, the game state is shifted to another game state. Specifically, if the first special symbol is a big hit, and the number of consecutive probability variation states has not reached the upper limit value (the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 0), the door breakthrough mode is started after the big hit ends. . On the other hand, when the number of consecutive probability variation states has reached the upper limit (the probability variation limit counter 203aa has become 0), the state after the big hit is set to the normal mode. In this case, it is notified that the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has reached the upper limit during the big hit. In other words, the effect of notifying that the state after the jackpot is the normal mode is executed, for example, in the jackpot ending period.

  In this way, in the second embodiment, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode, a winning ball can be obtained with a high probability (95% which is a ratio for determining the big hit E2). This results in an unfavorable result for the player that the remaining number of times of the probability variation state (value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa) is subtracted. Therefore, in the door breakthrough mode, the game can be performed in the hope that the second special symbol will not be a big hit.

  In the door breakthrough mode effect of the second embodiment, when a big hit E2 is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, an effect that fails to break through the door is temporarily executed (see FIG. 10A). The If the number of consecutive probability change states does not reach the upper limit value (if the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa is not 0), the adventurer 811 again tries to break through the door through the so-called revival effect. A production that succeeds is executed. On the other hand, if the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot E2 and the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has reached the upper limit value, the revival effect is not performed and the process proceeds to the normal mode as it is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize that the remaining number of continuous times has decreased when accompanied by a reviving effect even when shifting to the probability changing mode.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the probability variation mode, the state shifts to another state only when the first special symbol is a lottery. Specifically, if the first special symbol is a big hit, and the number of consecutive times of the probable change state has not reached the upper limit, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the door breakthrough mode 1, and the continuous number of the probable change state has reached the upper limit number of times. In this case, after the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to the door breakthrough mode 2.

  In addition, when it becomes the door breakthrough mode 2, as the door breakthrough mode effect, when the reserved balls of all the second special symbols are out (small hit), the breakthrough of the door fails and the normal mode is entered. An effect informing the transition is executed. That is, an effect that is the reverse of door break mode 1 (and door break mode effect in the first embodiment) is executed. Further, when the big hit E2 in the door breakthrough mode 2, the probability change mode is notified through the revival effect as in the case where the remaining continuous number of times of the probability change state remains in the door breakthrough mode 1.

  Thus, in the first embodiment, two types of door breakthrough modes are provided. That is, the door breakthrough mode 1 that shifts when the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit and any of the big hits A2 to D2, and the state where the probability variation state has reached the upper limit (limit) The door break-through mode 2 is provided that shifts when the jackpot is any of jackpots A2 to D2. As in the first embodiment, the door breakthrough mode 1 shifts to a probability change mode that is advantageous to the player when all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hits). It will be more advantageous if you do not win a big prize in the lottery. On the other hand, the door breakthrough mode 2 is internally a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, and is a state in which the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state is reset. Therefore, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed, the normal mode is entered, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this case, since the second special symbol jackpot during the door breakthrough mode 2 can be shifted to the door breakthrough mode 1 or the probability variation mode, it was a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. This is advantageous for the player. If all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit) in the door break-through mode 2 and shift to the normal mode, there is a possibility that a large amount of balls will be consumed before the big hit. It is.

  Depending on the type of door break-through mode, it may be advantageous that all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol are advantageous, or it may be advantageous that the bonus ball is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol Therefore, when it transfers to door breakthrough mode, it can be made to predict which mode this door breakthrough mode is. Then, according to the predicted mode type, it is possible to expect a loss or a big hit, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 72, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20B) in that an after-insertion flag 223i is added. doing. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The after-insertion flag 223i is a flag indicating that the power supply is turned on again after the door breakthrough mode is turned on in the middle because the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode, and the door breakthrough mode is resumed. It is. This post-injection flag 223i is set to ON when it is determined that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and that it is a change other than the last change in the door breakthrough mode effect. (Refer to S5102 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 73 to 79. First, the details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment.

  Of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, in each process of S301 to S309 and S311, S301 to S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same process as each process of S311 is performed.

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, after the variation pattern is determined in the process of S307 or S309, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S321), and the read counter value And a variation pattern command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 (S322).

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 73) in the second embodiment, after the process of S311 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is greater than 0 (S323). In the process of S323, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is larger than 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S323: Yes), the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is decremented by 1. In step S324, the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S323, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S323: No), the process of S324 is skipped, This process is finished as it is.

  By this special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 73), the progress status of the door break mode production (the value of the break mode counter 203ab) is included in the variation pattern command and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. it can. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the remaining frequency | count of the actual door break-through mode effect and the effect mode performed by the audio lamp control apparatus 113 shift. In particular, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily cut off, all the stored contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are cleared. It becomes unknown on the control device 113 side. Even in this case, if the configuration includes the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab with respect to the fluctuation pattern command, it is easy to analyze the fluctuation pattern command that is output first after the power is restored, Can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the effect mode before the power is shut off.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the situation where the second special symbol holding ball is present is basically only during the big hit and during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more and it is not a big hit, it may be determined that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. However, even if the player intentionally or mistakenly makes a right turn during normal times, the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol may be 1 or more. In such a case, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, when the power is restored, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is notified by the number of held balls command to be 1 or more, so that the door on the voice lamp control device 113 side The malfunction which misidentifies that it is in execution of breakthrough mode production will arise. In contrast, in the second embodiment, the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect is output by including it in the variation pattern command. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is 1 or more when the power is restored. It is possible to grasp whether the door break-through mode is being executed or whether the player has intentionally or mistakenly made a right turn at normal times. Therefore, it is possible to accurately return the effect mode after power restoration to the state before the power is shut off.

  In the second embodiment, the number of times of change until the door breakthrough mode effect is ended is grasped by the breakthrough mode counter 203ab and output in the change pattern command. Only the information indicating whether or not it is being executed may be included in the variation pattern command and output. And it is good also as a structure which grasps | ascertains the frequency | count of fluctuation | variation until a door breakthrough mode effect is complete | finished on the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 side based on the said information and the number of reservation balls of a 2nd special symbol. With this configuration, the main controller 110 side can omit the process of updating the door breakthrough mode counter 203ab, so that the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the normal symbol fluctuation process 2 (S106) in the second embodiment will be described. This normal symbol fluctuation process 2 (S106) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the normal symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.

  Of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, the processing of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 is the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S614 that the current symbol is in the normal state (S614: Yes), the variation of the normal symbol The time is set to 30 seconds (S631), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S614, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S632), and this process ends.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S620 that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the second incoming ball The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640b associated with the mouth 640 are set to “1 second × 2 times” (S633), and the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the current symbol is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640 are set to “ “0.2 seconds × 1 time” is set (S634), and the process proceeds to S623.

  Thus, in the second embodiment, the normal symbol normal state is shorter in the normal symbol normal time than the normal symbol short-time state, and the opening time when the normal symbol hits the normal symbol is shorter. It is configured to be long. Further, as described above, the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment is based on the normal symbol normal state (low probability state) and the normal symbol high probability state. The number of determination values to be determined is different by one. As a result, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, the hit probability is almost equal to the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the short time state of the normal symbol as a total. It becomes difficult. Therefore, in the probability variation mode in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. It is possible to prevent the lottery from being executed. Thereby, it can suppress that the lottery of a 2nd special symbol will be performed in situations other than during execution of door break-through mode production, and it will become an excessive disadvantage for a player. In addition, during the big hit that is set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so it is possible to easily store up to the upper limit number of reserved balls during the big hit. .

  Next, the startup process 2 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This startup process 2 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, instead of the startup process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

  Of the startup process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, the processes of S901 to S910 and S913 are respectively S901 to S910 and S913 of the startup process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The same processing as the above processing is executed. In the startup process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, when the process of S910 ends, a state command setting process for setting a state command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. (S921), the process proceeds to S913. Details of the status command setting process (S921) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The flowchart in FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S921). In this status command setting process (S921), first, the probability change flag 203g is read (S1801), and a status command is set based on the status of the read probability change flag 203g (S1802). Next, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol is changing (S1803). If it is changing (S1803: Yes), the execution area data and the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q are read (S1804). . Next, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S1805), and a variation pattern command is set based on each read value (S1806). Next, a stop type command is set (S1807), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1803 that the special symbol is not changing (S1803: No), each process of S1804 to S1807 is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

  By executing this state command setting process (see FIG. 76), the game state before the power is turned off, the progress of the door break mode effect, etc. are voiced in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75). The lamp control device 113 can be notified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described. The jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

  Of the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, in the processes of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same process as each process of S1107-S1109 is performed.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), first, the specific winning opening 650a is opened. The state is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1122), and this process is terminated. In the second embodiment, a variable winning device 650 is provided instead of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2 are not provided therein. Therefore, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77), it is not necessary to execute the process of switching the flow path, and these processes (S1202, S1203 in FIG. 38) are deleted.

  Also, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing in the process of S1109 (S1109: Yes), the jackpot end process ( In place of (see S1110 in FIG. 37), jackpot end processing 2 is executed (S1123), and this processing ends. Details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1123) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the jackpot end timing (S1109: No), winning processing 2 is executed instead of winning processing (see S1111 in FIG. 37) in the first embodiment (S1124). ), This process is terminated. Details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, a process corresponding to the abnormal process (see S1112 in FIG. 37) in the first embodiment is not provided. This is because in the first embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability change state after the big hit is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65. This is because in the second embodiment, there is a difference that the gaming state after the jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. For this reason, in the second embodiment, where the ball is left inside the variable prize winning device 650, it does not affect whether or not the state of probability change is caused, and the illegal act of leaving the ball inside. It does not hold itself. Therefore, in the second embodiment, an abnormality process (see FIG. 41) for determining whether or not an abnormality in which a ball remains in the variable winning device 650 has occurred is deleted.

  In the second embodiment as well, it is naturally possible to execute a process corresponding to the abnormality process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Thereby, when troubles, such as a ball clogging, generate | occur | produce inside the variable prize-winning apparatus 650, an error can be alert | reported at an early stage.

  Next, details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1123) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 (S1123). In the jackpot end process 2 (S1123), first, the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S1311), and it is determined whether or not the counter value after subtraction has become zero.

  In the processing of S1311, when it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 1 or more (S1312: No), it means that the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit value (limit). 203g is set to ON (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1315. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1311 that the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa after subtraction has become 0 (S1313: Yes), it means that the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has reached the upper limit value. Then, without executing the processing of S1313 to turn on the probability variation flag 203g (with the probability variation flag 203g kept off), the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is set to 4 (S1314), and the processing proceeds to S1315. .

  In the process of S1315 executed after the process of S1313 or S1314 is completed, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is read (S1315), and the read value is set to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. (S1316). Then, a state command is set based on the state of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa (S1317). By including the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa in the state command, not only the game state after the big hit but also the remaining number of times until the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state reaches the upper limit (limit) is grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. be able to. When the processing of S1317 ends, the big hit flag 203r is set to OFF (S1318), and this processing ends.

  Next, details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described with reference to FIG. This winning process 2 (S1124) is a process executed in place of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment as described above.

  Among the winning processes 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1401 to S1404 and S1406 to S1408 are respectively S1401 to S1404 and S1406 of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. The same processing as that in steps S1408 to S1408 is executed.

  Also, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1404 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or more (S1431), and the winning number counter If the value of 203j is 6 or more (S1431: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1431 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 6 (S1431: No), the process proceeds to S1406.

  In the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1409 to S1420 in the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are deleted. These processes are processes for determining whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability change switch 65e3, and for determining whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 at a normal timing. This is because the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in which the discharge flow path 65e2, the probability variation switch 65e3, and the like are not provided is unnecessary processing. By omitting these processes, the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. First, the startup process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. This startup process 2 (see FIG. 80) is a process executed instead of the startup process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  Of the startup process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, the processes in S4001 to S4013 are the same as the processes in S4001 to S4013 of the startup process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. In the startup process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4012 is completed, the power-on state is then based on the state command and the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. Is executed (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4013. Details of the on-loading state determination process (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this on-time state determination processing (S4021). In this on-state determination process (S4021), first, it is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4901). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4901: No). Then, a back image corresponding to the gaming state at the time of power-on is set (S4902), and this process is terminated. Here, the game state at the time of power-on is determined based on the data in the game state storage area 223h updated in the process of S4012 of the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80). The back image for the probability change state is set as the back image for the normal state in the normal state. Note that the door breakthrough mode effect is an effect executed during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and therefore there is no possibility of the door breakthrough mode when the power is turned on and the fluctuation is stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that a variation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), then the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4903). ), It is determined whether or not the extracted value is 0 (S4904). If the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed. If the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 or more, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. means.

  In the process of S4904, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is not 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4904: No), the breakthrough for selecting the effect mode of the door breakthrough mode effect is selected. A mode selection process is executed (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4907. Details of the breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S4904: No), the remaining fluctuation An effect mode corresponding to the time and the lottery result is determined (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. In the process of S4907, a display variation pattern command is set based on the effect mode determined in the process of S4905 or S4906 (S4907), and this process ends.

  Next, the breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the breakthrough mode selection process (S4905).

  In the breakthrough mode selection process (see FIG. 82), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 1 (S5001), and the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. If there is (S5001: Yes), it is then determined whether the variation pattern is a deviation (S5002). If it is determined in the process of S5002 that the variation pattern is a deviation (S5002: Yes), it is then determined whether the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is data indicating a probable change state (S5003). If it is in the probabilistic change state (S5003: Yes), the power is shut off and executed during execution of the variable display based on the retained ball of the last second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode 1 (see the middle left of FIG. 71). It means that the last ball in the middle was out (small hit). Therefore, in this case, the effect mode for notifying the transition to the probability change mode is determined as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining variation time (S5004), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5003, when it is determined that the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is data indicating the low probability state of the special symbol (S5003: No), the door breakthrough mode 2 (the middle part of FIG. 71). This means that the power supply was cut off during the execution of the variable display based on the last second special symbol holding ball in (see the right side) and that the last holding ball being executed was out (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining fluctuation time, the effect mode informing the transition to the normal mode is determined (S5004), and this process is terminated. Even if the state at the time when the power is turned on again by the processes of S5003 and S5004 is during execution of the last variation display in the door breakthrough mode effect, the door is based on the lottery result and the gaming state. The result of the breakthrough mode effect can be reported accurately.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5001 that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is not 1 (2 or more) (S5001: No), and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. When it is determined that the variation pattern being executed at the time of power recovery is a jackpot variation pattern (S5002: No), first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a jackpot E2 (S5006). In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot is E2 (S5006: Yes), it is then determined whether the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has reached the upper limit (limit) (S5007). Note that the remaining number of times until the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a state command together with the gaming state at the time of power-on.

  In the process of S5007, when it is determined that the upper limit value (limit) of the continuous number of probability variation states has been reached (S5007: Yes), the state after the big hit is the normal mode, so that the transition to the normal mode is notified. The process proceeds to the process of S5005 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5007 that the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not been reached, the state after the big hit becomes the probability variation mode. The effect mode is determined (S5008), and this process is terminated. As mentioned above, this revival effect is that the remaining number of times until the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times in the probabilistic state has decreased despite the fact that the winning ball has not been obtained due to the big hit E2. It is an effect to show. This revival effect allows the player to recognize that he has won the jackpot E2 during the door breakthrough mode effect.

  In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot E2 is not (S5006: No), it is then determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a jackpot D2 (S5009). In the process of S5009, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the jackpot D2 (S5009: Yes), it is determined to be a special effect mode indicating that it has been a jackpot in the door breakthrough mode effect (S5010). This process is terminated.

  In the process of S5009, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the big hit D2 (S5009: No), the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a deviation (small hit) and the current fluctuation pattern. Means that it is not the last change in the door breakthrough mode, and therefore the breakthrough production effect mode corresponding to the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is determined (S5011). That is, the mode of the door 814 is determined according to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. Then, the value of the breakthrough mode in-progress counter 203ab is set in the breakthrough effect counter 223g, the post-injection flag 223i is set to ON (S5012), and this process is terminated. By turning on the post-introduction flag 223i, it is possible to determine that the effect has been resumed from the middle of the door breakthrough mode when the power is turned on even when the next variation pattern is received.

  The door breakthrough mode effect in the second embodiment is basically 5.8 seconds from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the fourth specific winning opening 650a opening period, as in the first embodiment. A series of performances of the production time are set. That is, at the start of the door breakthrough mode effect, the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is determined in advance based on the look-ahead result of each reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, basically, during execution of the door break-through mode effect, when a variation pattern command of the second special symbol is newly received, it is only necessary to execute a predetermined effect mode as it is. However, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door break mode production, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, and the progress of the door break mode production and the result of the production It becomes impossible to grasp etc. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is turned off while the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed and the power is turned on again, the post-on flag 223i can recognize that fact. While the post-injection flag 223i is on, each time the variation pattern command is received, the breakthrough mode is determined based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and information indicating the lottery result. It is determined whether it is the end timing of the effect, and the effect mode according to the determination result is set. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect on the sound lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  Next, details of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This variable display setting process 2 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. Among the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) in the second embodiment, in the processes of S4801 to S4803 and S4805 to S4809, S4801 to S4803 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same process as each process of S4805-S4809 is performed.

  Further, in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 83) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4803 ends, the rough fluctuation display mode notified by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 ( Based on the (variation time), a variation pattern determination process for determining a detailed effect mode of the variation pattern is executed (S4811). Details of the variation pattern determination process (S4811) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S4811 is completed, a display variation pattern command is set based on the detailed effect mode of the variation pattern determined in S4811 (S4812), and the processing proceeds to S4805.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, details of the above-described variation pattern determination process (S4811) will be described. In the variation pattern determination process (S4811), first, it is determined whether or not the after-insertion flag 223i is on (S5101). Based on the rough mode of the fluctuation pattern extracted from the output fluctuation pattern command, the detailed production mode of the fluctuation pattern is determined (S5102), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the post-on flag 223i is on (S5101: Yes), the power is turned off after the power is shut off during the execution of the door break mode effect. Therefore, a process for determining an effect mode in the door breakthrough mode effect is executed according to the information of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the lottery result.

  Specifically, first, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S5103), and whether the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (that is, the last fluctuation in the door breakthrough mode effect). (S5104). In the process of S5104, if it is determined that the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), then whether the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is a deviation fluctuation pattern or not. If it is determined (S5105) and it is determined that the variation pattern is a deviation (S5105: Yes), based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h, it is determined whether the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol (S5106).

  In the process of S5106, when it is determined that the current state is the special symbol probability variation state (S5106: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 10B) for notifying the transition to the probability variation mode is determined, and the process is performed. The process shifts to S5116. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, when it is determined that the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol (S5106: No), the effect mode (see FIG. 10A) for notifying the transition to the normal mode is determined. (S5108), the process proceeds to S5116.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5104, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 2 or more (S5104: No), and the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. (S5104: Yes) and if it is determined that the big hit variation pattern has been notified (S5105: No), then it is discriminated whether it is a big hit E2 (S5109).

  In the processing of S5109, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot E2 (S5109: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the continuous number of probability variation states has been reached. However, if the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times has been reached (S5110: Yes), the state after the jackpot E2 cannot be set to the probability variation mode, so the transition to the normal mode is notified. The process shifts to S5108 for determining the production mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5110 that the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit (limit) (S5110: No), the effect mode of the revival effect is determined (S5111), and this process ends. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5109 that the current variation pattern is not jackpot E2 (S5109: No), it is then determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to jackpot D2. However, if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the jackpot D2 (S5112: Yes), a special door breakthrough mode effect presentation mode informing the jackpot is determined (S5113), and the process proceeds to S5116. And migrate.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5112 that it is not the big hit D2 (S5112: No), the current fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern (small hit), and the remaining number of fluctuations of the door breakthrough mode effect ( This means that the number of retained balls of the second special symbol) is 2 or more, so the effect mode of the door break mode effect is determined according to the value of the break mode counter 203ab extracted in the process of S5103 (S5114). Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set in the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S5115), and this process is terminated.

  Further, in the processing of S5116 executed after any of S5107, S5108, S5111, and S5113 is completed, the after-insertion flag 223i is reset to OFF and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is reset to 0 ( S5116), the process is terminated.

  By executing this variation pattern determination process, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off during the door breakthrough mode production, after the power is turned on again, production is performed from the middle of the door breakthrough mode production. The mode can be restored. More specifically, if the power is cut off during the execution of the door break mode production, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, thereby grasping the progress status of the door break mode production, the result of the production, and the like. It becomes impossible. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is turned off while the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed and the power is turned on again, the post-on flag 223i can recognize that fact. While the post-injection flag 223i is on, each time the variation pattern command is received, the breakthrough mode is determined based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and information indicating the lottery result. It is determined whether it is the end timing of the effect, and the effect mode according to the determination result is set. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect on the sound lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment has a configuration in which the gaming state after the jackpot is determined in advance for each jackpot type. In addition, an upper limit (limit) is set for the number of consecutive special symbol probabilities, so that if the upper limit is reached, even after winning the probable jackpot, the special symbol low probability state will be set after the jackpot It is composed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to form two types of door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1) in which the special symbol is in a probable change state and door breakthrough mode in which the special symbol is in a low probability state. it can. Therefore, when shifting to the door breakthrough mode, there is a possibility of shifting to the normal mode even if all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which it becomes advantageous or unfavorable to win a big hit during the door break-through mode according to the number of consecutive probable change states.

  Moreover, in this 2nd Embodiment, it was set as the structure which provides the electrically-driven accessory 640b with respect to the 2nd entrance 640, and in the high probability state (time-short state) of a normal symbol, it becomes difficult to open the electrically-driven accessory 640b, In the normal state (low probability state) of the symbol, the electric accessory 640b is easily opened. With this configuration, in the probability variation mode in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 even if the player hits the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery from being executed. Thereby, it can suppress that the lottery of a 2nd special symbol will be performed in situations other than during execution of door break-through mode production, and it will become an excessive disadvantage for a player. In addition, during the big hit that is set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so it is possible to easily store up to the upper limit number of reserved balls during the big hit. .

  In the second embodiment, the change pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 includes information indicating the remaining number of changes in the door breakthrough mode effect (the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab). Is included. Thereby, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door break-through mode effect, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 after the power is turned on again. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not the door break-through mode effect is being executed and the progress status when it is being executed simply by analyzing on the side. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect on the sound lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  In the second embodiment, by using a configuration in which the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is output in the variation pattern command, the sound lamp control is performed to determine whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the power is restored. Although it has been configured so that it can be discriminated on the device 113 side, it is not limited to this. For example, only the information indicating whether or not the second special symbol after the jackpot has ended is being included in the variation pattern command. That is, it is not necessary to include information on the remaining number of times of change display until the door breakthrough mode effect ends in the change pattern. And when the power supply is restored during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the type of variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command (whether it is a hit or not) It is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines whether it is the last fluctuation | variation of door breakthrough mode production. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the second embodiment, the variable pattern command is always output including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, only the first variation pattern command may be output including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. Thereby, the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command and output. However, it is not necessarily included in the variation pattern command. For example, a command for notifying only the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab may be separately prepared. That is, the main controller 110 may notify the sound lamp controller 113 by a command only when the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is changed. With this configuration, the data amount of the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, when the power is turned on, the game state is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the state command, and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is notified by the variation pattern command. The information notified to the control device 113 is not limited to this. For example, the result of prefetching of each reserved ball may be notified again by a winning information command. By configuring in this way, when the door break-through mode effect is being executed when the power is turned on, not only the fact that the door break-through mode effect is being executed, but also the result of the door break-through mode effect. When the power is turned on, the sound lamp control device 113 side can grasp this. Therefore, the production mode can be determined in consideration of the production result.

<Modification in Second Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, it was set as the structure which attaches the electrically-driven accessory 640b with respect to the 2nd entrance 640. FIG. The normal symbol low probability state has a shorter normal symbol variation time than the normal symbol high probability state, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640b when the normal symbol hits is longer. By doing so, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the second entrance 640 in the probability variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a storage valve 63a capable of storing (stopping) a sphere in the upper portion of the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a sphere stored in the storage valve 63a. There is provided a general winning opening 63 through which the stored ball can enter when the stored state is released. Although the details will be described later, the second entrance 640 in the present modification is basically provided at a position where it is impossible (difficult) to enter the ball even if it is right-handed. As an exception, a ball can enter the second entrance 640 only when a right hand is made in a state where three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a. More specifically, when right-handed in a state where three spheres are stored by the storage valve 63a, the sphere that has flowed down by right-handing collides with the third sphere stored. There is a possibility that the trajectory of the sphere is changed and the trajectory can enter the second entrance 640. In the present modification, the storage state is canceled at normal times and the storage state is set only during the big hit, so that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 only during the big hit. .

  With this configuration, it is not necessary to attach the electric accessory 640b to the second entrance 640. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, the electric accessory 64 a can be attached to the first entrance 64. Thereby, similarly to 1st Embodiment, it can be made to play a game, without reducing a holding ball by making it the state in which the electrically-driven accessory 64a is easy to open | release in probability change mode. In addition, since the electric accessory 64a is attached to the first entrance 64, the “special symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol time-short state” are set in the above embodiments. A gaming state that did not exist can be provided. More specifically, by changing the gaming state when the number of consecutive times of probability variation state reaches the upper limit (limit) to “low probability state of special symbol” and “short state state of normal symbol”, probability variation mode Is completed (after reaching the limit), a special symbol lottery can be executed while maintaining the ball (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times) (so-called special symbol lottery). (Retraction state) can be set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the probability change mode is ended, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the “special symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol time-short state” will be referred to as “retraction mode”.

  First, with reference to FIG. 85, the game board 13 according to a modification of the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, in the present modification, the electric accessory 64a is attached to the first entrance 64 as in the first embodiment. Thereby, in the “probability change mode” and the “retraction mode” that are set to the short time state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in this modified example, as in the first embodiment, it is configured not to be a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Further, in addition to the second winning hole 640 and the variable winning device 650, the general winning port 63 is provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable winning device unit 80. The general winning opening 63 is configured as a winning opening from which one winning ball is paid out when a ball enters. A storage valve 63 a is provided vertically above the general winning opening 63. The storage valve 63a can be changed between a protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)) protruding toward the front side of the front view and an embedded state (see FIG. 86 (b)) buried inside the game board 13. It is configured. In the protruding state of the storage valve 63 a, it is possible to prevent the sphere that has reached the storage valve 63 a from flowing down to the general winning opening 63 by storing (stopping) the sphere in the upper portion thereof. On the other hand, when the storage valve 63a is buried, the sphere can pass through the front side of the storage valve 63a. That is, the ball can flow down to the general winning opening 63. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86. In this modification, the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state (see FIG. 86B) at a normal time other than the big hit, and the storage valve 63a is set at the start of the big hit. Is changed from the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)). At the end of the big hit, the storage valve 63a is again changed from the protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)) to the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)).

  The protruding state and the buried state of the storage valve 63a will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a protruding state, and FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the storage valve 63a is in a protruding state with the start of the big hit, the flow path formed above the general winning port 63 is blocked by the storage valve 63a. As a result, the balls that have reached the flow path are stored (stopped) up to three above the storage valve 63a. In addition, during the jackpot, the player cannot make a winning ball unless he or she wins the ball to the specific winning opening 650a. In the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63, nails, windmills, and the like are arranged so that one out of two spheres fired by right-handing travels. Therefore, during one round of jackpot, a state is obtained in which three balls are stored in the information of the storage valve 63a (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the upper limit number of three balls is stored above the storage valve 63a and the ball is further hit to the right, the right-handed ball is In some cases, the ball collides with the third (last tail) ball stored by the storage valve 63a. The sphere that collided with the third sphere stored is reflected in the direction opposite to the previous flow direction, and as a result, in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, On the other hand, it becomes a trajectory capable of entering the second entrance 640 provided on the opposite side. In the modified example of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a enters the storage state based on the jackpot, and the storage state is maintained until the jackpot ends. Therefore, if a right-handed strike is made in order to make a ball enter the specific winning opening 650a during a big hit, three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a. When the player makes a right-hand hit to obtain a prize ball with three balls stored above the storage valve 63a, the newly launched ball collides with the stored ball. As a result of the change of the flow direction, the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, the player will continue to make a right-hand hit to win a prize ball during the jackpot, and at the end of the jackpot, the reserved balls of the second special symbol will be stored up to the upper limit (4) Can do. Although illustration is omitted, in the state where three spheres are stored by the storage valve 63a, some of the spheres fired by the right strike do not collide (interfere) with the stored spheres. It flows down in the direction of the specific winning opening 650a. Thereby, it is possible to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 and the specific prize opening 650a during the big hit.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the storage valve 63a is buried. As described above, when the big hit is completed, the projecting state is changed to the buried state, and the buried state is maintained (held) until the next big hit. When the storage valve 63 a is buried, the sphere can pass (flow down) through the flow path provided above the general winning port 63. Therefore, the ball launched into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 passes through the front side of the buried storage valve 63a and enters the general winning opening 63, or the general It flows down the flow path toward the specific winning port 650a provided in the middle between the winning port 63 and the second winning port 640. In this modification, since the storage valve 63a is in the buried state until the next big hit, after the big hit is finished, it is assumed that the right-handed ball normally enters the second entrance 640 Can be prevented. Thereby, since it can suppress that the lottery of the 2nd special symbol which is disadvantageous at the time of normal is performed, it can prevent (suppress) that it becomes too disadvantageous for a player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a state transition method in the present modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modification, in addition to the four states (normal mode, probability change mode, door break mode 1, door break mode 2) provided in the second embodiment described above, a pull back mode is provided. Is provided.

  The pull back mode is a state in which a low probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol are set. In this modification, when the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state is reached, the state after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol. For this reason, in this modified example, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol is in the short time state, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol becomes 0 in the door breakthrough mode 2, the pullback mode is set. .

  As shown in the upper right of FIG. 87, the pull-back mode shifts to another mode when the special symbol lottery for the short time (25 times) that has been set to be a big hit or not set to a big hit is completed. there's a possibility that. Specifically, when all the lottery of special symbols for the number of time reductions is missed, the mode shifts to the normal mode. In addition, since the low probability state of the special symbol is set in the pull-back mode, and the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state is reset, when the jackpot is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, the door break mode 1 is entered. .

  In this modification, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is easily opened in the short time state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the probability change mode and the pullback mode both have the same opening control of the electric accessory 64a, so it is difficult to determine whether the mode is the probability change mode or the pullback mode. In this modification, the player can recognize that the mode is the pull-back mode when the number of time reductions ends and the mode falls from the pull-back mode to the normal mode. In other words, in the pull-back mode, when the first special symbol lottery is a big win, it is difficult to determine whether the probability change mode is a big win or the pull-back mode is a big win. Therefore, by making a big hit in the pull-back mode, it is possible to make the player think as if the probability variation state continues beyond the upper limit of the number of consecutive probability variation states. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, in connection with the configuration in which the probability variation mode and the pullback mode cannot be distinguished from the operation of the electric accessory 64a and the like, in this modified example, all the retaining balls of the second special symbol are detached in the door breakthrough mode 2. Even in this case, an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door is executed. As a result, when the adventurer 811 performs an operation that successfully breaks through all doors in the door breakthrough mode production, the door breakthrough mode 1 is switched to the probability change mode, or the door breakthrough mode 2 is changed to the pull back mode. It can be difficult to tell if it has moved. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which it is not known how long the hit between the jackpot and the mode (probability change mode or pullback mode) in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set will continue.

  As described above, in the modification of the second embodiment, the sphere can be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 63a, and the right-handed sphere is determined depending on whether or not the sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 63a. It is possible to switch the direction of flow. When the ball is not stored in the storage valve 63a, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, while the storage valve 63a stores the upper limit number (three) of balls. If it is, the flow direction of a part of the newly launched sphere is switched by the stored sphere, and the trajectory is changed to a trajectory that can enter the second entrance 640. did. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 even if the right hand is made at the normal time when the storage valve 63a is set in the buried state. Further, during the big hit when the storage valve 63a is set to the protruding state, the ball can be configured to be able to enter the second entrance 640 when a right-hand hit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player from being executed at normal time while allowing the reserved balls of the second special symbol to be stored up to the upper limit at the end of the big hit.

  Further, in the modification of the second embodiment, when the number of consecutive times of the probable variation state becomes the upper limit, a short time state of a normal symbol that continues until a special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (25 times) is set. The configuration is as follows. With this configuration, when the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state reaches the upper limit, the special symbol lottery is performed without reducing the holding ball until the predetermined number (25 times) of the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to form a state in which can be executed (retraction mode). Therefore, even when the number of consecutive probable variation states reaches the upper limit and a low probability state of a special symbol is set after a big hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Further, the pullback mode and the probability variation mode are both configured so that it is difficult to distinguish each other from the appearance of the operation of the electric accessory 64a and the like because the short time state of the normal symbol is set. As a result, even when a big hit is made in the pull-back mode, the player can be made to think as if the big hit was made in the probability variation mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows the user to feel as if the probability variation state is continuing beyond the upper limit of the probability variation state.

  In the modified example of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a is provided above the general winning opening 63, and it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 depending on the state of the storage valve 63a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the general winning opening 63, a storage valve 63a may be provided above the second winning opening 640. In addition, while the big hit, the storage valve 63a is set in the buried state so that a right-handed ball can enter the second entrance 640. You may comprise so that a ball | bowl may become difficult to enter into the 2nd entrance 640 by making the valve 63a into the protrusion state. Thereby, since the general winning opening 63 can be omitted, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the modification of the second embodiment, an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state, but instead, an upper limit may be provided for the number of lotteries for special symbols in one probability variation state. That is, when the probability variation is a big hit, the special symbol may be in a state where the probability variation state continues after the big hit, for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 130 times. With this configuration, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has been reached, so that the processing load at the end of the big hit can be reduced. Also, in this case, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is reached, the probability change state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol are set, while the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol is set, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, with a high probability (for example, a ratio of 95%), the winning ball can hardly be obtained and the jackpot type that shifts to the normal state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol after the jackpot is determined. . By configuring in this way, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a novel gameplay that allows a game to be played in the hope that it will not be a big win in the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol accumulated during the big win is realized. be able to.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 103. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the second entrance 640 and the specific winning opening 65a are provided in the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. There is a possibility that only the right-handed sphere will flow into the right-hand channel on the front view (the sphere will not flow into the right-hand channel on the right-hand side even if left-handed), so the second entry In both the mouth 640 and the specific winning opening 65a, if the player hits the right, the ball can enter (easy to enter), and if left-handed, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). For this reason, when a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery, if the ball is hit to the right to obtain a prize ball, the ball also enters the second entrance 640. It can be in a state where the reserved balls of symbols are accumulated up to the upper limit. Thereby, after the jackpot of the first special symbol, a state is formed in which a lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous when the jackpot is made, is continuously executed.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, if the left hand is made, the ball can enter (easy to enter), and if the right hand is made, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). Two types of specific winnings, 656a, and right specific winning opening 657a, where the ball can enter (easy to enter) if left-handed and the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) if left-handed. It was set as the structure which provides a mouth. As the jackpot type of the first special symbol, only the left specific winning port 656a is opened in all rounds (the right specific winning port 657a is difficult to open) and the left specific winning port 656a in the first round. Are opened, and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other rounds (the right specific winning opening 657a is easily opened). That is, there are few opportunities to make a right hit during a big hit (it is difficult to store the second special symbol holding ball during a big hit) and there are many opportunities to make a right hit (a second special symbol holding ball during a big hit) It is configured to provide a jackpot type that is easy to accumulate. If there is little opportunity to make a right-hand hit (it is difficult to store the second special symbol holding ball during the jackpot), it is less likely that the jackpot will be included in the holding ball that exists at the end of the jackpot, The possibility of shifting to the probability change mode can be further increased. On the other hand, if there is a large number of opportunities to make a right hit (a reserve ball of the second special symbol is easy to accumulate during a big hit), the possibility that a big hit will be included in the held balls that exist at the end of the big hit increases. Therefore, the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode is relatively low. Thereby, since the difference in the degree of advantage according to the jackpot type can be further increased, when the jackpot is won, attention can be paid to that type. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation until the jackpot type is determined.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable display due to the greater difference in the degree of advantage according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol. It was set as the structure which suggests a jackpot classification according to the classification. More specifically, the number of rounds is small (2 rounds or 5 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened except for the first round (reserved balls of the second special symbol are easy to accumulate). In the case of an unfavorable jackpot type), it is informed that the jackpot has been won when three main symbols simulating an even number of the same numbers are arranged on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the number of rounds is large (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other than the first round (it is easy to collect the reserved balls of the second special symbol). In this case, a notification that three main symbols imitating any of eight types of numbers other than “7” among the numbers “1 to 9” are arranged on the display screen is performed. Furthermore, if it is the most advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds, the jackpot type that digests all rounds by left-handed), one of the 3 symbols that imitates the numbers "1-9" May be available. In other words, when three main symbols with an odd number other than “7” are arranged, it indicates that it is a big hit of at least 16 rounds, and when a main symbol with “7” is arranged. Means that the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and that it is a jackpot type in which a winning ball can be obtained by making a left strike in all the jackpot rounds. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while paying attention to the types of main symbols arranged on the display screen at the end of the variable display, so that it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, the most advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds and the jackpot type that digests all the rounds by left-handed), and numbers other than “7” are arranged in the variable display effect. Then, an effect that is changed (promoted) to “7” is executed by the promotion effect executed during the jackpot. That is, the most advantageous jackpot is informed of the “7” set indicating the most advantageous jackpot during the variation display effect or the jackpot after the variation display effect. Similarly, the number of rounds is the largest (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened except for the first round (the second special symbol holding ball is easy to accumulate). When the numbers are aligned, an effect that is changed (promoted) to an odd number of numbers other than “7” is then executed by the promotion effect executed during the jackpot. That is, in the 16th round jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened except for the first round, an odd number of numbers other than “7” is notified during the variable display effect or the jackpot after the variable display effect. In addition to the opening of the right special prize opening 657a other than the first round, even with a small number of rounds (5 rounds or 2 rounds), even numbers were arranged by the variable display effect, and developed into a promotion effect. Even in this case, even numbers are kept aligned without being changed (promoted) to odd numbers. In this way, by providing the promotion effect, the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot type that is once less advantageous in the variable display effect (simulating the same number of even numbers corresponding to the jackpot of 5 rounds or 2 rounds). 3 combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot type having a high degree of advantage due to the promotion effect (corresponding to the most advantageous jackpot) The player can be expected to be changed (promoted) to a combination or the like. Thereby, the interest can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. The process is partly changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 88, in the gaming board 13 in the third embodiment, instead of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, the left variable winning device 656 is installed in the left channel of the gaming board 13. At the same time, a right variable winning device 657 is provided in the right channel. The internal structure of the left variable winning device 656 provided in the left channel of the game board 13 is the same as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment. In other words, the ball that has entered the left specific winning opening 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 inside the left variable winning device 656. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2 during the jackpot and the ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3, the probability changing state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is finished. On the other hand, the right variable winning device 657 has only a function of paying out eleven winning balls when a ball entering the right specific winning opening 657a is detected. In other words, the winning device has a simple configuration in which a switch (probability change switch 65e3) to be determined whether or not to assign a probability change state is not provided.

  The left specific winning opening 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is the first round (in the case of jackpot A3 to C3 described later) or all rounds (in the case of jackpot D3 described later) when the first special symbol jackpot ). On the other hand, the right specific winning opening 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened after the second round when it becomes a big hit A3 to C3. When it becomes the jackpot type (big jackpot D3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, it is possible to obtain a winning ball simply by continuing left-handing during the jackpot. That is, there is no need to make a right-hand hit that may cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so that after the big hit, the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous (that is, the probability variation state is given). There is no possibility of being a big hit (low). In other words, in the lottery executed after the jackpot based on the holding ball existing at the end of the jackpot, there is no possibility of being a jackpot again (low). Therefore, when it becomes the big hit type (big hit D3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, the player can have a greater satisfaction. Hereinafter, the type of jackpot that can digest the jackpot by left-handing in all rounds is referred to as “left-handed jackpot”. On the other hand, the type of jackpot that digests the jackpot by making a right hit after the second round is referred to as a “right hit jackpot”.

  On the other hand, when the right specific winning opening 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened after the second round, the winning ball cannot be obtained unless the right round is made after the second round. (It becomes difficult), so a large amount of balls enter the second entrance 640 during the big hit. Therefore, it can be made the state which the reservation ball of the 2nd special symbol accumulated to the upper limit at the end of jackpot. If there are many reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the big hit, the possibility of winning a big win in the lottery based on the reserved balls after the big win becomes higher than the left-handed big hit. For this reason, after the jackpot is over, it is possible to form a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous when the jackpot is reached, can be continuously executed. It is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows a game to be played in the hope that all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the big hit will be missed (small hit).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the promotion effect which is a kind of display effect in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, as described above, the main symbols to which the numeral “7” is attached may be arranged only during the variable display for notifying the left-handed jackpot. Moreover, there is a possibility that main symbols with odd numbers other than “7” are aligned during a variable display for notifying 16 round jackpots. In other words, there is a possibility that the main symbols with even numbers are arranged even in the variable display for notifying the left-handed jackpot or the variable display for notifying the 16 round jackpot. In the third embodiment, when the main symbols with an even number are arranged in the variable display for notifying 16 round jackpots or left-handed jackpots, after the jackpot opening period to the end of the first round Over the interval period, the main symbol once arranged in the variable display is changed (promoted) to a main symbol imitating the number “7” or a main symbol imitating an odd number other than “7”. Executed. As a result, even when main symbols simulating even numbers are prepared in the variable display, it is possible to expect that promotion effects are executed during jackpots and promoted to symbols simulating odd numbers. Therefore, even when the even number of symbols are arranged in the variable display, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation for the game is reduced. In addition, the promotion effect is configured such that the rate of execution when the promotion is successful is higher than when the promotion fails. Thereby, when a promotion effect is performed, a player's sense of expectation for promotion can be improved.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the jackpot opening period in which the promotion effect is set. As shown in FIG. 89 (a), in the jackpot opening period in which the promotion effect is set, the third symbol arranged in the variable display (in the example of FIG. 89 (a), the main symbol imitating “2”). Continues to be displayed. In addition, a display area HR <b> 5 in which characters “promotion chance !! Further, on the left side of the display area HR5, a display area HR1 in which a character “left-handed” and a left-pointing arrow image are displayed is displayed. A cannon 815 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that an effect using the cannon 815 is executed by left-handed.

  The reason for notifying the left-handed in the opening period is that the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round. By starting left-handed during the opening period, it is possible to efficiently win the ball to the left specific winning opening 656a at the start of the first round.

  FIG. 89B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the first round. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), during the first round, when the winning of the ball to the left specific winning opening 656a is detected (the winning ball), the third symbol (the main symbol imitating “2”) is displayed by the cannon 815. A directing effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), the bombarded portion of the third symbol is in a state where the field of view is blocked by the smoke K1. Thereafter, each time a ball entering the left specific prize winning opening 656a is detected, an effect in which the third symbol is bombarded (bombarded effect) is executed, and smoke increases.

  FIG. 90 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of one round in the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), at the end of one round, smoke K1 to K7 is displayed so as to cover all of the third symbol. By covering all of the 3rd symbol, the player can predict whether the 3rd symbol that appears after the smoke has cleared will remain even or promoted to an odd number. The expectation for promotion can be improved.

  FIG. 90 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the interval period after the end of one round when the promotion to left-handed jackpot is successful (that is, when the current jackpot type is left-handed jackpot). . As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the promotion to the left-handed jackpot is successful, after the smoke K1 to K7 clears, the effect that three main symbols imitating the number “7” appear is executed. Is done. In addition, a character “promoted to a super big bonus !!” is displayed on the display area HR5. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the player has left a big hit. Therefore, great satisfaction can be given to the player.

  In the case of promotion to a 16-round right-hit jackpot symbol (a main symbol imitating an odd number other than “7”), the character “promotion to big bonus !!” is displayed on the display area HR5. Is displayed. In addition, if the promotion fails (that is, if this jackpot type was a right-handed jackpot other than 16 rounds), the main symbol will be changed to an imitation even after the smoke K1-K7 clears up. In addition to executing an effect that has not been performed, characters “promotion failure ...” are displayed in the display area HR5. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand whether or not the promotion is successful, and when the promotion is successful, the jackpot type. Therefore, an easy-to-understand presentation can be provided.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the probability variable switch 65e3 is provided inside the left variable winning device 656, and the left variable winning device 656 is left in both cases of left-handed big hit and right-handed big hit. The specific winning opening 656a is configured to be opened in the first round of jackpot. With this configuration, the opening operation can be made the same until the end of the one-round interval period regardless of whether the jackpot is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the left specific winning port 656a or the right specific winning port 657a, it can be difficult to distinguish between left-handed jackpots and right-handed jackpots. Therefore, when the promotion effect is executed, the game can be played while paying attention to the contents of the effect, so that the effect effect of the promotion effect can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect is executed in the first round in which the left variable winning device 656 in which the probability variation switch 65e3 is provided operates. Thus, when the promotion effect is executed, even if it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the left specific winning opening 656a and will be in a promising state after the big hit, it will be focused on whether or not to be promoted. The remaining games in the first round can be played.

  Here, in a general gaming machine, a game with a big hit is performed by paying the most attention to whether or not it is in a probable variation state. In other words, it is common to play a game with a big hit, paying the most attention to whether or not a ball wins a winning opening with a built-in probability change switch. However, once the ball has passed through the probability change switch and it is determined that it will be in a state of probability change, the player will be satisfied at that point, and the remaining game at the jackpot will simply be a task to obtain a prize ball. There was a case where it became.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be executed from the jackpot opening period to the interval period of the first round. That is, the promotion effect continues even after passing the probability change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after it is determined that the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 and the probability variation state is established, attention can be paid to the result of the promotion effect, so the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3. Later, you can focus on the production. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the jackpot is simply a work for obtaining a prize ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot.

<Electric Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. First, the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 91A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91A, the ROM 202 in the third embodiment has an open scenario selection table 202e added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 13A). Is different. Further, the difference is that the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 91B, details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the third embodiment, four types of jackpots A3 to D3 are provided as jackpots of the first special symbol. Also, four types of jackpots E3 to H3 are provided as jackpot types of the second special symbol. The jackpots A3 to C3 and E3 are jackpots corresponding to the jackpots A to D in the first embodiment, respectively, and are right-handed jackpots with 16 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds, and 16 rounds, respectively. That is, it is a jackpot where the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in rounds other than the first round of jackpot. In the right-handed big hit, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened from the second round. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a right ball cannot be obtained by winning the right specific winning opening 657a unless right-handed. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, by making a right-hand hit during a big hit, a large amount of balls enter the second entrance 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13 and the end of the big hit In some cases, the reserve ball of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous can be stored up to the upper limit. Therefore, after the end of jackpots A3 to C3 and E3, it is possible to shift to the door breakthrough mode in the same manner as after the jackpots A to D in the first embodiment. As a result, after the jackpots A3 to D3 and E3 are finished, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows a game to be played in the hope that it will not be a jackpot in the special symbol lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. it can.

  On the other hand, the jackpot D3, H3 is a left-handed jackpot with 16 rounds, and the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds. If you hit a left-handed jackpot, you can get a prize ball simply by making a left-handed hit during the jackpot. That is, there is no need to make a right-hand hit that may cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so that after the big hit, the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous (that is, the probability variation state is given). (It is difficult) There is no possibility of being a big hit (it goes directly to the probability change mode without going through the door break-through mode). Therefore, when it becomes the big hit type (big hit D3, H3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, the player can have a greater satisfaction.

  The jackpots F3 and G3 are jackpots corresponding to the jackpots E and F in the first embodiment, and are jackpot types in which it is difficult for the ball to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. That is, in each jackpot round, it is a jackpot type in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened only for 0.2 seconds. Since the right variable winning device 657 is not provided with the probability changing switch 65e3, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from passing through the probability changing switch 65e3 when the jackpot F3 or G3 is reached. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol can be made more disadvantageous. In addition, with the configuration in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in each round when the big hit F3, G3 is reached, in the third embodiment, the right specific winning opening 657a is also provided in the case of a small hit. It is configured to be opened. As a result, when the right specific winning opening 657a is opened, it may be difficult to identify whether the opening is due to the big hit F3 or G3 or the small hit. it can. Therefore, since it can be difficult to identify whether or not the second special symbol is a big hit from the operation of the right specific winning opening 657a, as in the first embodiment, attention is paid to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect. A game can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), the first special symbol C2 is associated with the value “0-4” in the range of “0-4” for the first special symbol, with “big hit A3” having 16 rounds. (See 202b1 in FIG. 91 (b)), and the range of “5-84” is defined in association with “big hit B3” with 5 rounds (see 202b2 in FIG. 91 (b)). ), The range of “85 to 94” is defined in association with “big jackpot C3” having two rounds (see 202b3 in FIG. 91B), and the range of “95 to 99” includes rounds. “Big jackpot D3” of 16 rounds is defined in association with it (see 202b4 in FIG. 91 (b)). Since the value that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2 is 100 from “0 to 99”, the ratio that “big hit A3” is determined when the big hit of the first special symbol is 5% (5 / 100). Similarly, the rate at which “big hit B3” is determined is 80% (80/100), the rate at which “big hit C3” is determined is 10% (10/100), and “big hit D3” is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100). That is, in the first special symbol lottery, the ratio of right-handed jackpot (big hit A3 to C3) is 95%, and the percentage of left-handed jackpot (big hit D3) is 5%. Since the ratio of left-handed jackpots is extremely low as compared to the ratio of right-handed jackpots, it is possible to make the player feel more satisfied when an advantageous left-handed jackpot is notified.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 3”, and “big hit E3” with 16 rounds is included. It is defined in association with each other (see 202b5 in FIG. 91 (b)), and in the range of “4 to 48”, “big hit F3” having 7 rounds is defined in association (see FIG. 91 (b)). 202b6), “49-98” is defined in association with “big jackpot G3” with 6 rounds (see 202b7 in FIG. 91 (b)), and “99” has the number of rounds. 16 rounds of “big hit H3” are defined in association with each other (see 202b8 in FIG. 91 (b)). Therefore, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is reached, the ratio at which “Big Jack E3” is determined is 4% (4/100), and the ratio at which “Big Jack F3” is determined is 45% (45/100) The ratio at which “big hit G3” is determined is 50% (50/100), and the ratio at which “big hit H3” is determined is 1% (1/100). That is, when the big special is won by lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit (any one of the big hits F3 and G3) to which the probability variation state is difficult to be given is 95%. Therefore, if the second special symbol is a big hit during the door breakthrough mode, the mode is shifted to the normal mode at a very high rate (95%). In addition, the ratio of winning jackpots 656a to which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened (a probable change state is given after jackpot) is 5%, of which 4% is right-handed jackpot (jackpot E3) and 1% is left-handed jackpot ( Big hit H3). Therefore, if the player wins a left-hand jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, it can make the player feel very lucky, so that the player can feel greater joy. .

  In the third embodiment, there is a possibility that the promotion effect is executed even when the jackpot is E3 or H3. Since both jackpots E3 and H3 are 16 round jackpots, the jackpot is E3 and H3. When the promotion effect is executed, the effect that the main symbols simulating odd numbers other than “7” in the variable display are executed. After that, an effect of whether or not to promote to a main symbol imitating “7” is executed in the promotion effect. The jackpot H3 is a rare jackpot type that can only be selected at a rate of 1% in the jackpot of the second special symbol, but the possibility of jackpots F3 and G3 accounting for 95% at the stage when the jackpot is announced is excluded Is done. That is, at the time when the jackpot is notified in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined that the allocation is 4% jackpot E3 or the allocation is 1% jackpot H3. Therefore, since the jackpot H3 is 1/5, it is possible to make the player recognize that this is the most advantageous jackpot chance. Furthermore, as described above, since the promotion effect is set so that the rate of execution when the promotion is successful is higher, the jackpot is notified by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the promotion effect is developed. In this case, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot H3 can be further increased. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, the details of the open scenario selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The open scenario selection table 202e includes, for each jackpot type, as a release scenario, the type of a specific winning opening to be released in each round of jackpot (one of the left specific winning opening 656a and the right specific winning opening 657a), and an opening period ( This is a data table that defines a long release for a maximum of 30 seconds or a short release for a maximum of 0.2 seconds. When a big win is won, an open scenario corresponding to the big win type won this time is read from the open scenario selection table 202e and stored in an open scenario storage area 203ba described later. Then, during the jackpot, the opening operation for each round is set according to the scenario defined in the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), as the open scenario corresponding to the jackpot types “jackpot A3” to “jackpot C3” and “jackpot E3” (that is, right-handed jackpot), the left specific winning for the first round The long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the mouth 656a is defined in association with each other, and the long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the right specific winning opening 657a is defined in association with each round after the second round (see FIG. 92 (a) 202e1). As a result, in the case of a right-handed big hit, the left specific winning port 656a is opened only in the first round, and the right specific winning port 657a is opened in each round after the second round. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, the player cannot obtain a winning ball unless he / she hits the right specific winning hole 657a by right-handed and plays a big hit game, so the second winning hole provided on the right side of the game board 13 A large number of balls enter 640 during the big hit. Therefore, since the holding ball of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit value at the end of the right-handed jackpot, the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is continuously executed after the jackpot ends. Mode "can be set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which a game is played in the hope that it will continue to be out of the lottery of the second special symbol after the jackpot ends.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), as an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type “big jackpot D3” and “big jackpot H3” (ie, left-handed jackpot), the length of the left specific winning opening 656a for all rounds Opening (maximum 30 seconds) is defined in association (see 202e2 in FIG. 92A). Thereby, in the left-handed big hit, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained only by making a left-hand strike aiming at the left specific winning opening 656a in all rounds. That is, since it is not necessary to make a right-hand hit during the big hit, there is no possibility that the ball will enter the second entrance 640 during the big hit. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, in many cases, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous at the end of the jackpot will be zero, and the most advantageous directly without going through the “door breakthrough mode” after the jackpot ends It is possible to shift to the “probability change mode”. Thereby, when it is left-handed jackpot, the player can have greater satisfaction.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), as an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type “big hit F3” and “big hit G3”, the right specific winning opening 657a is shortly opened (up to 0.2 seconds for all rounds). ) Are defined in association with each other (see 202e3 in FIG. 92A). As a result, in the case of “big hit F3” and “big hit G3”, it is almost impossible to obtain a winning ball, and the ball passes into the left specific winning opening 656a and passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. There is no possibility of doing. In other words, it is possible to form an unfavorable jackpot without obtaining a winning ball and without being given a certain change state after the jackpot.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, by setting the release operation in accordance with the release scenario defined in the release scenario selection table 202e, the same release operation can be accurately set every time for all jackpot types. Can do.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). FIG. 92B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92B, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that an open scenario storage area 203ba is added. ing. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The open scenario storage area 203ba is a storage area for storing (storing) the open scenario when a win is won and an open scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the open scenario selection table 202e. It is. At the start of each round in the jackpot, according to the open scenario stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba and the number of rounds of the new round, the type of the specific winning opening to be released (left specific winning slot 656a, right specific winning prize Any of the mouths 657a) and the open period (either long open for up to 30 seconds or short open for up to 0.2 seconds).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 93A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93A, the ROM 222 of the third embodiment has a promotion effect lottery table 222b added to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20A). Is different. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The details of the promotion effect lottery table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. The promotion effect lottery table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery). For each jackpot type, a random value (determination of the effect lottery counter 223j) that is determined to execute the promotion effect is determined. Value) ranges are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), “0-49” is defined in association with “big hit A3” as the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j (FIG. 93). (See 222b1 of (b)). Although details will be described later, the effect lottery counter 223j is configured as a random number counter that generates a value in the range of “0 to 99”, and can take 100 values of “0 to 99”. Therefore, when the “big hit A3” is reached, the rate at which the promotion effect is determined is 50% (50/100). When the jackpot A3 (16 rounds of right-handed jackpot) was determined and the promotion effect was determined, an effect was performed in which three main symbols (3rd symbol) imitating the same even number in the variable display were arranged After that, an effect that promotes to a main symbol imitating the same odd number other than “7” in the promotion effect in jackpot is executed, and it is notified that it is a 16-round right-handed jackpot. On the other hand, when the promotion effect is not determined, an effect in which main symbols imitating odd numbers other than “7” are executed in the variable display effect. In this case, the promotion effect is not executed during the jackpot, and the normal jackpot effect (see FIG. 8) is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 93B, “0-19” is associated with “big hit B3”, “big hit C3”, and “big hit E3” as the range of the value of the production lottery counter 223j. (Refer to 222b2 in FIG. 93 (b)). Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223j, 20 counter values (random values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion effect are defined, so “big hit B3”, “big hit C3” The ratio of the promotion effect to be determined when either of the jackpots E3 is “20% (20/100)”. When the promotion effect is determined by the “Special Jackpot B3” (5 rounds, right-handed jackpot) or “Big Jack C3” (two rounds, right-handed jackpot) in the first special symbol drawing, After an effect in which three main symbols simulating the same number are executed, an effect in which the promotion fails in the promotion effect at the jackpot is executed. If the promotion effect has not been determined, an effect in which the main symbols imitating even numbers are performed in the variable display effect is executed, and then the normal jackpot effect without developing into the promotion effect (see FIG. 8). Is executed.

  Also, when the promotion effect is determined by the “Special Jackpot E3” (16 round right-handed jackpot) in the second special symbol lottery, the main number simulating the same odd number other than “7” in the variable display After the effect that three symbols are arranged, the effect that fails to promote is executed by the promotion effect that is executed during the jackpot. If the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect that the main symbols imitating the same odd number other than “7” are displayed in the variable display is executed, it does not develop into the promotion effect, and the normal jackpot An effect (see FIG. 8) is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the value range of the production lottery counter 223j is “0 to 79” for “big hit D3” and “big hit H3” (16 round left-handed big hit). Are defined in association with each other (see 222b3 in FIG. 93B). Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223j, 80 counter values (random values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion effect are defined, so “big hit D3” or “big hit H3” ”Is 80% (80/100). When the promotion effect is determined with the first special symbol lottery, the promotion is decided, and after the effect that three main symbols imitating the same number in the variable display are arranged, the promotion is made in the jackpot An effect that promotes to a main symbol that imitates the number “7” in the effect is executed, and it is notified that it is a 16-round left-handed jackpot. In addition, when the promotion effect is determined by the “special bonus H3” in the second special symbol lottery, the effect that three main symbols imitating the same odd number other than “7” in the variable display is executed. After that, an effect of promoting to the main symbol imitating the number “7” is executed in the promotion effect of jackpot, and it is notified that it is a 16-round left-handed jackpot. When the promotion effect is not determined, an effect in which main symbols imitating the number “7” are arranged in the variable display effect is executed. In this case, the promotion effect is not executed during the jackpot, and the normal jackpot effect is executed.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. As shown in FIG. 93 (c), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20 (b)) and the promotion lottery counter 223j. The difference is that a performance flag 223k is added. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect lottery counter 223j is a counter used for effect type lottery, such as determination of whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery). This production lottery counter 223j. The value is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. When the promotion effect is lottery, it is determined whether any of the random values (counter values) defined in the promotion effect lottery table 222b matches the value of the effect lottery counter 223j. If the values match, the promotion effect is determined. Execution is determined.

  The promotion effect flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not a promotion effect is set. When the promotion effect flag 223k is on, it indicates that the promotion effect is set, and when it is off, it indicates that the promotion effect is not set. This promotion effect flag 223k is set to ON when a special design lottery is selected and a winning lottery for promotion effect executed at the start of the variation of the third symbol is won in the case of one of the big hits A to E, G. (Refer to S5405 in FIG. 103). Also, after the end of the promotion effect is set, it is set to off (see S4515 in FIG. 101).

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 94 to 97. First, the details of the special symbol variation process 3 (S121) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This special symbol variation process 3 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

  Of the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 94) in the third embodiment, in each process of S201 to S221, each of the processes of S201 to S221 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 94) in the third embodiment, when the process of S219 ends, the release for selecting the release scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type from the release scenario selection table 202e. A scenario selection process (S241) is executed, and the process proceeds to S220. Details of the open scenario selection process (S241) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the above-described open scenario selection process (S241). In the release scenario selection process (S241), first, the release scenario selection table 202e (see FIG. 92A) is read (S1901), and the release scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified (S1902). Next, the specified open scenario is stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba (S1903), and this process ends.

  With the release scenario specified in the release scenario selection process (see FIG. 95) and stored in the release scenario storage area 203ba, the release operation of each round of jackpot can be set to an appropriate operation according to the jackpot type. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) will be described. This jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening operation during the jackpot.

  Of the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, in the processes of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1112, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same process as each process of S1107-S1112 is performed. Also, in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment. Instead of (see FIG. 38), the jackpot operation setting process 3 is executed (S1131), and the process ends. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131). The jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the number of jackpot rounds. Of the jackpot control process 3 (S1131) in the third embodiment, the processes in S1202 to S1204 are the same as the processes in S1202 to S1204 of the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Is executed.

  When the jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 97) in the third embodiment is executed, first, the open scenario data stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba is read (S1211), and the read data is read out. Based on the above, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened in the current round (the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) and the opening time are specified (S1212). Next, the opening of the specific winning opening (the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) of the type specified in the processing of S1212 is set (S1213), and the opening time specified in the processing of S1212 is started this time. The round time is set as the round time (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1202.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 97), it is possible to accurately set the release operation for each round according to the release scenario stored in the release scenario storage area 203ba.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 103. First, with reference to FIG. 98, the jackpot related process 3 (S4221) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. This jackpot related process 3 (S4221) is a process executed instead of the jackpot related process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

  Of the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, the processes of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 are respectively the jackpot related process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those in S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 are executed.

  In the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, if it is determined that the opening command is received in the process of S4401 (S4401: Yes), then, whether or not a promotion effect is set. The opening command process for setting the corresponding opening effect is executed (S4411), and the process is terminated. Details of the opening command process (S4411) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4403 that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include a round number command (S4403: Next, it is determined whether or not a winning command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4412). If it is determined in the process of S4412 that a winning command is included (S4412: Yes), a specific winning opening (left specific winning opening 656a or A winning command process for setting a winning effect when a winning for the right specific winning opening 657a) is detected is executed (S4413), and the process is terminated. Details of the winning command process (S4413) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that no winning command is included (S4412: No), the process proceeds to S4405.

  In the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4405 that a close command has been received (S4405: Yes), the close command process (see FIG. 49), the closing command process 3 is executed (S4414), and this process is terminated. Details of the close command process 3 (S4414) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the above-described opening command process (S4411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the opening command process (S4411).

  In this opening command process (see FIG. 99), first, it is determined whether the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5201). If it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5201: Yes), The opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect (see FIG. 89A) is determined (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5204. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that the promotion effect flag 223k is off (S5201: No), the opening effect of the aspect corresponding to the current jackpot type is determined (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Transition. In addition, the aspect according to jackpot type is the effect of the aspect as if the door breakthrough mode effect is continuing in the case of jackpot F3, G3. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type other than jackpot F3 or G3, the effect is an aspect in which it is notified that the jackpot has been won.

  In the process of S5204, a display opening command indicating the aspect of the opening effect determined in the process of S5202 or S5203 is set (S5204), and this process ends. By executing this opening command process, it is possible to execute an opening effect in an appropriate manner depending on whether or not a promotion effect is set.

  Next, details of the above-described winning command process (S4413) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. When the winning command process (S4413) is executed, it is first determined whether the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5301). If it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5301: Yes) ) Executes a shelling effect (see FIG. 89B) in which the main symbol is fired with the cannon 815 (S5302), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the promotion effect flag 223k is off (S5301: No), a normal winning effect is set (S5303), and the process ends. The winning effect in the normal mode indicates an effect suggesting the acquisition of a prize ball. For example, an effect of acquiring gold coins or an effect of displaying “GET” is executed.

  By executing this winning command process (see FIG. 100), each time the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a in the round of jackpot where the promotion effect is set, the main symbol is staged by the shelling effect. Can be hidden with smoke images. By performing an effect in which the main symbol is hidden and it is not known whether or not to be promoted, the player's expectation for promotion can be further enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the notification as to whether or not to promote is performed in the interval period after the end of one round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to notify the result, and if the lottery is won, one round end condition (seven or more balls win a prize) Or 30 seconds have passed), the result may be notified. Further, for example, when the execution of the promotion effect is determined, it may be determined by lottery in addition to how many times the left specific winning opening 656a is notified of the result of the promotion effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect the promotion to be notified every time the ball wins the left specific winning opening 656a, so the game in the first round of the jackpot where the promotion effect is set Can improve the interests of the elderly. Further, in a case where the result of the promotion effect can be notified even if the end condition of the first round is not satisfied, the result may be notified before the end condition is satisfied only when the promotion is promoted. . That is, if the promotion fails, the promotion failure is always notified in the interval period after the end of the first round. On the other hand, if the promotion is successful, the left specific winning a prize mouth at a predetermined rate. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports by the number of winnings less than the upper limit number of winnings with respect to 656a. With this configuration, when the promotion fails while expecting the promotion to be notified every time the left specific winning opening 656a is won, the expectation for the promotion is longer (until the end of one round). Can be sustained.

  Next, the details of the close command process 3 (S4414) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This close command process 3 (S4414) is a process executed in place of the close command process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment, as described above.

  Of the closing command processing 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, each processing in S4502 to S4505 is the same as each processing in S4502 to S4505 in the closing command processing (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment. Processing is executed.

  In addition, when the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment is started, first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S4511). In the process of S4511, when it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S4511: Yes), it means that the end condition of the first round of jackpot in which the promotion effect is set is established. That is, since it means the timing for notifying the result of the promotion effect, it is next determined whether the jackpot being executed is any one of jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512). In the process of S4512, when it is determined that none of the jackpot B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: No), it is determined that the jackpot type for which the promotion effect is set this time is the jackpot A3, D3, or H3. means. In other words, since it means a jackpot type that succeeds in promotion, in this case, an interval effect (see FIG. 90 (b)) in which the promotion is notified is set (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4515. To do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4512, when it is determined that the big hit being executed is any one of the big hits B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: Yes), it means that it is a big hit type that fails to be promoted. An interval effect in a mode of notifying the promotion failure is set (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4515. In the process of S4515, the end of the promotion effect is set by turning off the promotion effect flag 223k (S4515), and this process ends.

  Further, in the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4511 that the promotion effect in-progress flag 223k is off (S4511: No), then the big hit being executed Whether or not is a big hit F3 or G3 is determined (S4516). In the process of S4516, when it is determined that the big hit being executed is either big hit F3 or G3 (S4516: Yes), the process proceeds to S4502. On the other hand, in the process of S4516, when it is determined that the big hit being executed is neither the big hit F3 nor G3 (S4516: No), the interval effect of the aspect according to the number of rounds is set (S4517), and the process is performed. finish.

  By executing the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101), when the promotion production end condition is satisfied (the end timing of one round is reached), the result of an appropriate mode is notified according to the jackpot type. be able to.

  Next, details of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 3 (S4131) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. Of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) in the third embodiment, the processes of S4801 to S4809 are the same as the processes of S4801 to S4809 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

  Further, in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4803 ends, a promotion effect lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a promotion effect (lottery) is executed (S4821). ), The process proceeds to S4804. Details of the promotion effect lottery process (S4821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 103), first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern informing any of the jackpots A3 to E3 or H3 (S5401), and the jackpots A3 to H3 and E3 are determined. If it is determined that the change pattern is not a notification pattern (that is, it is out of place or a jackpot F3 or G3) (S5401: No), there is no possibility of executing a promotion effect. Exit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the change pattern is one of the big hits A3 to E3 and H3 (S5401: Yes), a process for lottery of execution of the promotion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the promotion effect lottery table 222b is read (S5402), and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is set within the range of the counter value (random value) corresponding to the type of jackpot of this time in the read table. It is determined (lottery) whether or not the promotion effect can be executed by determining whether there is a matching value (S5403). And it is discriminate | determined whether execution of a promotion effect was determined by determination (lottery) by the process of S5403 (S5404).

  In the process of S5404, when it is determined that the execution of the promotion effect has not been determined (S5404: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5404 that the execution of the promotion effect is determined (S5404: Yes), the promotion effect execution flag 223k is set to ON to indicate the execution of the promotion effect (S5405). It is discriminated whether the jackpot type is jackpot E3 or H3 (S5406).

  In the process of S5406, if it is determined that neither the jackpot E3 nor H3, it means that the promotion of the promotion effect is decided as a jackpot of the first special symbol, so the third symbol imitating the even number is changed. The stop symbol at the time of stop is set (S5407), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5406, if it is determined that it is one of the jackpots E3, H3 (S5406: Yes), it means that the execution of the promotion effect is decided as a jackpot of the second special symbol, A third symbol imitating an odd number other than “7” is set as a stop symbol at the time of variable stop (S5408), and this process is terminated.

  By this promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 103), it is possible to determine whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery) and to set a stop symbol when the promotion effect is won.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the left hand is made, the ball can enter (easy to enter), and when the right hand is made, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). The left specific winning opening 656a and the right specific winning opening 657a that the ball can enter (easy to enter) if left-handed and the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) if left-handed. Two types of specific winning openings are provided. When a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a during the big hit, the special ball has a special symbol after the big win because the ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3 inside the left variable winning device 656 in addition to the payout of the winning ball. The probability variation state is given. On the other hand, when a ball enters the right specific winning opening 657a, the same number of prize balls as the case where the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a is paid out, but the gaming state set after the big hit Will not be affected. Further, in the third embodiment, as the type of jackpot, only the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds. The right specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in the other rounds (the right specific winning opening 657a is easily opened). In the second and subsequent rounds, it is configured to provide a jackpot that makes it easier to acquire more prize balls if the player makes a right strike than a left strike. With left-handed jackpots, there is no need to hit the right during the jackpot (there is less chance of making a right-handed hit), so it is difficult to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol during the jackpot, whereas with a right-handed jackpot, 2 Since the winning ball cannot be obtained unless it is made right-hand after the round, it becomes easy to accumulate the reserved ball of the second special symbol during the big hit. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, it is difficult to execute the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends (the possibility that the jackpot of the second special symbol is held at the end of the jackpot is reduced) ) On the other hand, if it is a right-handed jackpot, it will be easier for the second special symbol lottery to be executed after the jackpot ends (the possibility of the second special symbol jackpot being held at the end of the jackpot) Is higher than left-handed jackpot). Thereby, after the end of the left-handed jackpot, the game can be performed with confidence until the next jackpot is reached. On the other hand, after the right-handed jackpot is over, the game can be played with the expectation that no big hit will be made until all disadvantageous second special symbols based on the second special symbol hold ball are finished. As described above, according to the third embodiment, the gameability after the jackpot can be switched according to the jackpot type, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In addition to the number of rounds for jackpots and the gaming state set after jackpot, the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery after jackpots (the ease of holding a retreat within the hold) must be varied according to the jackpot type. Can do. Thereby, the difference of the advantageous degree for every jackpot type can be enlarged more. Therefore, when the most advantageous left-handed jackpot is achieved, the player can have greater satisfaction.

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be executed over the period from the jackpot opening period to the first round interval period. That is, the promotion effect continues even after passing the probability change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after it is determined that the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 and the probability variation state is established, attention can be paid to the result of the promotion effect, so the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3. Later, you can focus on the production. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the jackpot is simply a work for obtaining a prize ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot.

  In the third embodiment, the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round of jackpot for both right-handed jackpots and left-handed jackpots. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the round in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened and the number of times may be arbitrarily determined. When the right specific winning opening 656a is opened in rounds other than the first round in the right-handed big hit, the first round starts by opening the right specific winning opening 657a in the first round. The jackpot type will be known at that time. Therefore, the promotion effect may be executed during the opening period while the jackpot type is unknown.

  In the third embodiment, two variable winning devices, a left variable winning device 656 and a right variable winning device 657, are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13, respectively. A variable winning device may be provided only on the right side of the board 13. And it is good also as a structure which provides the storage valve 63a upstream of the 2nd entrance 640 similarly to the modification of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. Then, instead of providing a left-handed jackpot and a right-handed jackpot, the storage state of the storage valve 63a is maintained during the jackpot (that is, the ball reaches the second entrance 640 even if the right-hand hit is made during the jackpot. It is good also as a structure which provides the jackpot type which is not possible and a jackpot type which a storage state is cancelled | released (that is, if a right-hand hit is made during a jackpot, a ball can reach | attain the 2nd entrance 640). With this configuration, the number of variable winning devices can be reduced, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, as the promotion effect, an effect of bombarding the third symbol with the cannon 815 is executed. However, the effect mode of the promotion effect is not limited to this. Any effect may be set as long as it is an effect that makes it easy to inform the player of the two types of modes of successful promotion and unsuccessful modes. For example, the adventure displayed during the door breakthrough mode effect The player 811 may perform an effect of promoting the symbol by attacking the third symbol. Further, the promotion effect is not limited to the effect of promoting the third symbol. For example, the adventurer 811 and the enemy may perform a battle without displaying the third symbol, and the left hit jackpot may be notified by winning the enemy. Thereby, the freedom degree of production can be raised more.

  In this 3rd Embodiment, although the timing which alert | reports the result of a promotion effect was set to the end timing of the 1st round, it is not restricted to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports the result of a promotion effect in response to a predetermined number (for example, five) of balls having won in the left specific winning opening 656a. In addition, the number of winning prizes that trigger the result notification need not be fixed, and may be determined by lottery, for example. In this case, it is possible to set a winning number with a high ratio selected in the case of a left-handed big hit or a winning number with a high ratio selected in the case of a right-handed big hit. By configuring in this way, it is left specific for a player who wants to detect the jackpot type (whether left-handed jackpot or right-handed jackpot) at an early stage according to the timing when the result of the promotion effect is notified. A game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls that have won (entered) a winning opening 656a. Therefore, the player's interest in the first round of jackpot can be further improved.

  In the third embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the promotion effect is executed by lottery when the jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to always execute the promotion effect. Thereby, since the lottery process of the promotion effect can be omitted, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Also, for example, when a right-handed jackpot is made, the promotion effect is always executed in a manner in which the promotion fails, and when left-handed jackpot, the number “7” is displayed in the variable display effect by lottery. To determine whether to display the 3rd symbol imitating the number, or to display the main symbol imitating an even number once, and to promote to the 3rd symbol imitating the number “7” by promotion effect It is good. By configuring in this way, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, it is possible to play a jackpot game in anticipation of promotion every time. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which carries out the fixed display of the 3rd symbol corresponding to a jackpot type by a variable display effect without performing a promotion effect in all jackpot types. Thereby, since an arbitrary effect can be executed in the jackpot opening period or the first round, the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased.

  In the third embodiment, when the first special symbol is drawn and left-handed jackpot, and when the promotion effect is executed, the variable display effect always displays the third symbol imitating an even number. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol imitating an odd number other than “7” may be fixedly displayed and promoted to a main symbol imitating the number “7” by a promotion effect. Further, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect is configured to be executed over one round of jackpot from the jackpot opening period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a promotion effect within the fluctuation | variation period of the variable display effect which alert | reports jackpot, and it is good also as a structure which performs a promotion effect over a fluctuation period and a jackpot opening period.

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect is configured to be executed as an effect for notifying whether it is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot, but there is no distinction between a left-handed jackpot and a right-handed jackpot. It is good also as a structure applied to the machine 10 (For example, the general game machine in which a probability variation jackpot and a normal jackpot exist). More specifically, for example, when it is a probable big hit, it is configured so that the third symbol imitating an even number or the third symbol imitating an odd number is fixedly displayed by a variable display effect. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, the third symbol imitating an even number is displayed in a fixed manner by the variable display effect. Then, when the 3rd symbol imitating the odd number and imitating an even number is confirmed and displayed, a promotion effect for promotion to the 3rd symbol imitating an odd number may be executed thereafter. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, it may be configured to execute a promotion effect in a mode in which promotion fails at a predetermined rate. Thereby, the versatility of a promotion effect can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, the probability variation switch 65e3 is provided only inside the left variable prize winning device 656, and if the ball is not entered into the left variable prize winning device 656 during the big hit, a special symbol probability changing state is given after the big hit. It was not configured. That is, even in the case of a right-handed big hit, the first round is configured to play a game by aiming to the left variable winning device 656 by left-handed, but is not limited to this. For example, a probability variation switch 65e3 may be provided inside the right variable winning device 657 as in the case of the left variable winning device 656. And when it becomes a right hit big hit, you may comprise so that only the right variable prize-winning apparatus 657 can enter a ball in all rounds. By configuring in this way, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, only the first round is left-handed to pass the ball to the probability variation switch 65e3 and win a prize ball, and in the remaining rounds, the game is stopped. It is possible to prevent the method from being performed. That is, for the purpose of avoiding the ball entering the second entrance 640 during the right hit big hit, the ball is launched only in the round (first round) in which the left specific winning entrance 656a can enter. An irregular game method can be suppressed. When this irregular game method is executed, there are few prize balls for right-handed jackpots (only one round can be obtained), but the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is not executed, so It will not fall into mode. Therefore, there is a possibility that the probabilistic state continues semipermanently and gives an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. On the other hand, in the right-handed big hit, by adopting a configuration in which only the right variable winning device 657 is set to be able to enter a ball, the above-described irregular gaming method can be made fundamentally ineffective. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall.

  In the third embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, by changing the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 during the jackpot, among the held balls held at the end of the jackpot The possibility that jackpots are included (so-called “reserved in-range resorts” may occur) is variable. In other words, by changing the direction in which a prize ball can be obtained by firing a ball according to the type of jackpot, the possibility of the occurrence of a reserved villa is physically different. It is not something that can be done. For example, it is good also as a structure which makes controllable the ease of generation | occurrence | production of a pending | holding consecutive resort in control. More specifically, for example, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, only a right side of the game board 13 is provided with a special winning opening for winning a winning ball during a big hit, and a special symbol probability changing state is set. The number of lotteries to be made may differ depending on the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot with one lottery to be in a promiscuous state and a jackpot with four times are provided). By configuring in this way, in the case of a jackpot type in which the number of lotteries to be in a probable state is one, the probability of winning a jackpot in the second and subsequent special symbol lottery is reduced, so even the first lottery is missed. Then, there is a high possibility that all lotteries based on the holding ball will be missed. On the other hand, when the number of lottery times in which the probability change state is four, all the lotteries based on the second special symbol hold ball are executed in the special symbol probability change state, and are therefore held at the end of the jackpot. There is a high probability that a lottery based on the holding ball will be a big hit. Therefore, the operation similar to that of the third embodiment described above can be realized with only one variable winning device. In addition, when it is set as the structure which complete | finishes a probability change state by the number of lotteries predetermined according to jackpot classification like this modification, for example, all the lotteries based on the holding ball of the 2nd special symbol will be removed. As a benefit in the case of normal, it may be configured so as to be in a short time state of a normal symbol. In other words, the number of lotteries in which the special symbol is prone to change is different from the number of lotteries in which the normal symbol is in the short-time state, and, for example, 100 special symbols are drawn regardless of the number of lotteries in which the special symbol is prone to change. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may become a short state of a normal symbol until it complete | finishes. In this case, as a more advantageous jackpot type, a jackpot type may be provided in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given and only the short-time state is given. By configuring in this way, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot can be performed in a low probability state of all the special symbols, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is all out The possibility of becoming can be further increased.

  In the third embodiment, the jackpot type that is easily stored and the jackpot type that is difficult to store during the jackpot and the jackpot type that is difficult to store are provided, so that the jackpot is held again at the end of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting a jackpot type that is easy to store the reserved ball of the normal symbol during the jackpot, and a jackpot type that is difficult to store the reserved ball of the normal symbol during the jackpot, the number of held balls of the normal symbol at the end of the jackpot It is good also as a structure which varies the possibility that a normal symbol hit will occur after a big hit. In addition, by changing the probability of winning a normal symbol after the jackpot depending on the type of jackpot, the normal symbol will be used for a predetermined period after the jackpot ends (for example, until all the reserved balls of the normal symbol at the end of the jackpot are consumed). It is good also as a structure which changes the ratio elected in the hit according to jackpot classification. Even in such a configuration, the player's degree of advantage can be varied according to the jackpot type, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the jackpot type.

  In the third embodiment, when the promotion effect is set, the ball enters the specific winning opening 656a in the first round, and after it is determined that the special symbol will be changed after the big hit, Each time the player enters the left specific winning opening 656a, an effect that gives an expectation as to whether or not to be promoted (effect that bombards the third symbol) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the promotion effect may be executed in the jackpot opening period. In the first round of the jackpot, an effect indicating that the left specific winning opening 656a is opened (for example, an effect in which an image imitating the letter “V” is displayed) may be executed. Good. With this configuration, the player is unaware that the jackpot has been started, continues to see the result of the promotion effect, and fails to enter the ball into the left specific winning opening 656a (probability jackpot Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being given after the big hit). In addition, for example, in the first round of jackpot, an effect indicating that the left specific winning opening 656a is a round to be opened is during the first round (even after the ball has entered the left specific winning opening 656a). The configuration may be such that the promotion effect is continuously executed and the promotion effect is executed after one round is completed. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to prevent a ball from being missed into the left specific winning opening 656a, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged excessively. Furthermore, no promotion effect is executed at all (that is, the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is always stopped and displayed in the variable display), and the left specific winning opening 656a is opened during the jackpot. It is good also as a structure which continues performing during the round which shows whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from mistaking the direction of launching the ball.

  In the third embodiment, for a pachinko machine 10 having a spec that shifts to a probabilistic state after the jackpot is completed when a ball that has entered the left variable winning device 656 passes the probability changing switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 After winning the left specific winning opening 656a in the round and confirming the probable change state, the result of the promotion effect is informed. However, the specs to which the promotion effect can be applied are not limited to this. Absent. A promotion effect can be applied if it is a spec that may shift to either a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous compared to the advantageous state at a predetermined opportunity. For example, the promotion effect may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having a spec that is awarded a jackpot when a ball enters a specific area inside a variable prize device provided on the game board. That is, in the lottery based on the start prize, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the ball can easily enter the variable winning device (movability of the variable winning device). Even in such a case, if the ball is entered into the variable winning device and the ball does not enter the specific area, the jackpot is not given. In this specification, the type of jackpot given when a ball enters the specific area may be notified after the ball enters the specific area and the jackpot is confirmed. More specifically, at the time of winning the lottery of whether or not the variable winning device is movable, a lottery of a jackpot type given when entering a specific area and whether or not to execute a promotion effect are drawn. Then, when a lottery for promotion effect is won, even if an advantageous jackpot type is won, a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type (for example, the same even number) is displayed. And, when the variable winning device is moved and the ball can enter the ball, the ball is inserted into the variable winning device, and when the ball is entered into the specific area, it corresponds to the original jackpot type. An effect of displaying the combination of the third symbols (for example, being promoted to the same odd number or maintained as the even number) is executed. With this configuration, even after a ball enters a specific area, it is possible to focus on the effect in the hope that an advantageous jackpot type will be notified by the promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from entering the specific area until the jackpot ends from being simply an operation for obtaining a prize ball. That is, since it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability change switch 65e3 is not provided (the gaming state after the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type), the gaming state after the jackpot is configured to be notified by the promotion effect. May be. In other words, during a big hit, the player configures whether the short-time state or the probable change state is set after the big hit, and then configures the short-time state and a part when the probable state is set. Then, when the jackpot ends, the fact that the time is short is notified. And if the probability variation state is set, the promotion effect is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the probability variation state is obtained as a result of the promotion effect based on a predetermined trigger (for example, when a predetermined number of start winnings are detected). It is good also as a structure which performs the effect to promote. In addition, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot is ended and the promotion effect is executed, an effect that fails to promote to the probability change state may be executed based on a predetermined trigger. In addition, for the pachinko machine 10 in which the same opening pattern is set for the specific winning opening by the small hit and so-called “accuracy”, the fact that the small win is informed once and the winning is won May be configured to notify the advancement to a certain chance at a predetermined opportunity by the promotion effect. Furthermore, an open pattern that cannot pass through the probability change switch is once set with a jackpot type in which an open pattern that can pass through the probability change switch is set and a jackpot type in which an open pattern that cannot pass through the probability change switch is set. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports the jackpot classification and alert | reports the promotion to the jackpot classification in which the open pattern which can pass a probability change switch is set by a predetermined opportunity.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. In the above-described third embodiment, when the jackpot with the promotion effect set is started, the promotion effect is executed over the jackpot opening period, the first round period, and the interval period. In the promotion effect, an effect is executed to promote the combination of the main symbols confirmed and displayed in the variable display effect informing the jackpot to the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the jackpot that is more advantageous for the player. If successful, the system is configured to notify that it was a more advantageous jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, a configuration in which one variable display effect is executed in a pseudo manner in the execution period of the variable display for notifying the jackpot and the period from the start of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. It was. As a result, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won, the jackpot type (whether it is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot) in the case of the jackpot can be notified with one variation display effect.

  FIG. 104 (a) is a display that can be displayed when a left-handed jackpot (any of jackpot D3 or H3) is made in a special symbol lottery, and when a reach state is lost in a special symbol lottery. It is the figure which showed the aspect. As shown in FIG. 104 (a), in the present modification, when the reach state occurs, the characters “left-handed” and the image of the left-pointing arrow are displayed on the upper left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display area HR1 in which is displayed is displayed. Further, in the upper center portion of the display screen, a display area HR5 on which the characters “Lit to the left and stop the symbol!” Are displayed. With these displays, the player can easily understand that the symbol is stopped and displayed by firing the ball to the left.

  In the case of jackpot, the display mode shown in FIG. 104 (a) is set at the timing when the jackpot opening period is started. That is, in the present modification, the third symbol is not stopped and displayed even in the jackpot opening period and remains in the reach state. Under this circumstance, if the left-handed strike is not suggested, it may be delayed in the first round that the ball is fired toward the left specific winning opening 656a. If the launch to the left specific winning opening 656a is delayed, there is a possibility that the ball cannot enter during the open period of the left specific winning opening 656a (the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3), and the probability variation is a big hit. Nevertheless, there is a possibility that the probabilistic state is not given after the big hit. In order to prevent such a situation, the present modification is configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 104 (a)) that suggests left-handed when the opening period starts during the execution of the variable display. Further, in order to prevent (suppress) whether or not a big hit is detected from the display mode, a predetermined timing (for example, one second before the third symbol is fixedly displayed) even during execution of the deviation fluctuation display. In the configuration, an effect (see FIG. 104A) suggesting left-handed is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to know whether the game is a big hit or miss until the third symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be maintained for a longer time.

  FIG. 104 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when all of the third symbols are stopped and displayed, which is either jackpot D3 or H3. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), the number “7” is triggered by the player making a left turn during the execution of an effect suggesting a left turn and entering the left specific winning opening 656 a. The effect that the 3rd design (main design) imitating is arranged is executed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the player has left-handed jackpot. In addition, paying attention to the whereabouts of the launched ball (whether or not to enter the left specific winning opening 656a) by notifying the jackpot based on the ball having entered the left specific winning opening 656a A game can be performed. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved. Note that if the special symbol lottery is missed and an effect that suggests a left-handed strike is performed, the left specific winning opening 656a is not opened, and the ball fired by left-handed strikes the left specific winning opening 656a. Never do. In this case, after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the effect suggesting left-handed is executed, the stop symbols of the out-of-combination combinations (combinations other than the crests) are stopped and displayed.

  In the example of FIG. 104, the case where the jackpot is D3, G3 has been described as an example, but the same effect is executed even with other jackpots. That is, when the jackpot is A3 or E3, an effect in which the third symbols (main symbols) imitating odd numbers other than “7” are executed, and when the jackpot is B3 or C3, an even number is obtained. An effect is produced in which the third symbols (main symbols) imitating the numbers are aligned. In addition, even when the detachment is accompanied by the reach state, the reach state may be entered with a number other than “7”.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the change over time in the effect mode after the start of the variable display effect in the case where the special symbol lottery is a big win and the case where the game is out of reach with the reach state. First, with reference to FIG. 105 (a), a description will be given of the change over time in the effect mode in the case of a big hit.

  FIG. 105 (a) shows the change over time in the production mode in the case of developing to super reach and making a big hit. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is started, first, the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds, and then the reach state occurs when 10 seconds elapse. . Then, after a normal reach production for 20 seconds, it develops into a super reach production when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Furthermore, after the super reach effect continues for 28 seconds, an effect suggesting left-handed (left-handed navigation, see FIG. 104 (a)) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), when the effect suggesting left-handed is displayed, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the jackpot has actually elapsed, and the jackpot opening period has been entered. ing. For this reason, in the 1st symbol display device 37, the change display of the 1st symbol (special symbol) ends when 58 seconds have passed from the start of the change, and the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed.

  When one second of the opening period has elapsed and the left specific winning opening 656a has been opened and a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a, the third symbol (similar to the same number in the third symbol display device 81) An effect (see FIG. 104 (b)) in which the main symbols are aligned is executed. And it is alert | reported that it was a big hit, and the production | presentation which shows that it is a big hit is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), even when a lottery result with a reach state is reached, until the left-handed navigation (see FIG. 104 (a)) is displayed after the variable display is started. The production mode is the same as in the case of jackpot (see FIG. 105 (a)). Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), in the case of detachment, the third symbol combination indicating detachment is stopped and displayed one second after the left-handed navigation (see FIG. 104 (a)) is displayed. It is informed that it has come off.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the variation time when the special symbol is a big hit is set to be shorter by 2 seconds than the variation time when the special symbol is lost. This is because, when an outlier fluctuation display is executed, a special symbol lottery result is notified within the execution period of the fluctuation display, whereas when a win fluctuation display is executed, This is because the variable display is executed over the opening period and the period of the first round. If the same variation time is used for jackpot and off, the timing for generating left-handed navigation will be different between the case of jackpot and off, and the lottery result will be displayed before the end of the variation production due to the difference in variation time. There is a risk of being perceived. On the other hand, in this modified example, since the variation time is longer when the player is out of the jackpot than the jackpot, the timing for displaying the left-handed navigation can be matched between the jackpot and the jackpot. Therefore, since it becomes difficult to perceive the lottery result of the special symbol from the variation time, attention can be paid to the result of the variation display effect.

  As described above, in the modified example of the third embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the variation period of the variation pattern, the jackpot opening period, and the period of the first round It was set as the structure which performs 1 fluctuation | variation display effects. By configuring in this way, in addition to whether or not it is a jackpot, it is possible to notify the jackpot type in one variable display effect, so that the game is played with attention by the variable display effect. Can do.

  In addition, in this modification, it was set as the structure which will be in the reach state with the number type corresponding to the jackpot type when it is a jackpot in the variable display effect. It is good also as a structure to draw lots. If the execution of the promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect is used by using the remaining period after the jackpot symbol is notified in the first round of jackpot and the interval period after the end of the first round. It is good also as a structure which performs. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect the promotion effect to be executed even if the third symbols with even numbers are once prepared, so that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  In the present modification, an image suggesting left-handedness is displayed in the upper left display area HR1 in the last two seconds of the jackpot opening period and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation, but this is not a limitation. It is not something that can be done. For example, an effect that suggests left-handedness to the player may be performed in a manner that is more conspicuous than the changing third symbol. Specifically, for example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the above-described modified example, the letters “Aim for V !!” and the left variable prize-winning device 656 are provided on the layer on the front side of the changing third symbol. It is good also as a structure which displays the image shown typically. When a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a (when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit), the third symbols imitating the same numbers are all displayed in a stopped display. As a background, an image imitating the letter “V” may be displayed in front of the third pattern. The display of the image imitating the character “V” may be continued until the end of one round, for example. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to see the result of the effect without launching the ball until the variable display ends. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to make the ball enter the left specific winning opening 656a more reliably in the first round. Further, for example, the changing third symbol may be displayed in a translucent manner so that the effect of suggesting left-handedness may be more conspicuous, or the third symbol may be temporarily hidden.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 112, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, when it loses by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, it is set as the structure which becomes a small hit with high probability, the opening period of the door 65f1 in the case of a small hit, and the big hit E, The opening period of the open / close door 65f1 in each round of F is the same (0.2 seconds). Further, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of jackpots E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the variation time in the variation display of the second special symbol. . As a result, whether or not the jackpot E or F is included in the second special symbol holding ball that is held at the end of the jackpot, or if it is all off, until the door breakthrough mode effect ends The series of opening / closing operations of the opening / closing door 65f1 is the same.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the type of jackpot that is easy for the player to detect whether the result of the variation display of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot ends is out of place, and the type that is difficult to detect. It was set as the structure which provides jackpot. As a result, depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to determine whether or not the second special symbol hit is included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is confirmed, and whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect has been executed. It is possible to switch between easy-to-detect gameability.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the main The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107, the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The ROM 202 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 13A) in that the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b and the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed. Is different. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106, in the fourth embodiment, five jackpot types A4 to E4 are provided as jackpot types of the first special symbol. In addition, three jackpot types F4 to H4 are provided as jackpot types for the second special symbol.

  The jackpots A4, B4, D4, F4 to H4 are jackpot types that perform the same operations as the jackpots A to F in the first embodiment. That is, the jackpots A4 and F4 are jackpots with 16 rounds, the jackpot B4 is a jackpot with five rounds, and the jackpot D4 is a jackpot with two rounds. When these jackpots are reached, the door 65f1 is opened for 30 seconds at the maximum in each round, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained during the jackpot, and the balls can be easily passed to the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Can do. The jackpot G4 is a jackpot of seven rounds, and the jackpot H4 is a jackpot of six rounds. When these jackpots are reached, the open / close door 65f1 is opened only for 0.2 seconds at the maximum in each round, so that almost no prize balls can be obtained, and there is almost no possibility that the balls will pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Absent.

  The jackpot C4 has the same action as the jackpot B4 (5 rounds jackpot), but after the jackpot ends, whether the lottery of the second special symbol is off during the execution of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol It becomes easy to distinguish. More specifically, when the jackpot C4 is reached, if the second special symbol lottery is lost after the jackpot ends, the variation time (3 seconds) differs from the jackpot G4, H4 interval period (1 second). Second) is easily selected. Therefore, by observing the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened, it can be estimated whether or not the special symbol lottery has been missed. In other words, after the jackpot, if the player feels that the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened is more than 1 second, this opening will be out of the special symbol (small hit). It is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility of opening based on the fact.

  The jackpot E4 has the same operation as the jackpot D4 (two round jackpot), but, like the jackpot C4, is a jackpot type that makes it easy to determine whether the lottery of the second special symbol is missed after the jackpot.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot C4 or the jackpot E4 is reached, whether or not the special winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened is observed to determine whether or not it has come off. It is configured to be able to guess. Thereby, after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to play the game by paying attention not only to the content of the door breakthrough mode effect but also to the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1). In particular, during the execution of an aspect in which the risk of becoming a big hit of a disadvantageous second special symbol is high (the effect of opening the door 814 using the tattered key 813) When it is felt that the opening interval of the winning opening 65a exceeds 1 second, the possibility that the current variation is a variation display corresponding to the deviation is increased, so that the player can be relieved. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the big hit (big hit C4, E4) that makes it easy to guess whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big win is missed is referred to as “special hit”.

  On the other hand, if it is a big hit A4, B4, D4, F4, as in the first embodiment, whether the lottery result of the second special symbol executed after the big hit is out (small hit) or a big hit? Can not be identified from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, whether or not the game has been missed and whether or not the second special symbol hit is included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is confirmed. Since it is possible to switch between easy-to-detect gameability during execution of the door break-through mode effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot B4 and jackpot C4 are configured so that the jackpot operation (the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81) is exactly the same. Yes. Similarly, the jackpot D4 and the jackpot E4 are configured so that the operations during the jackpot are exactly the same. For this reason, when the jackpot ends in 2nd or 5th round, whether or not the game has been missed, and it is not known whether or not the 2nd special symbol hit was included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect was confirmed. It is difficult to identify which is set to be easy to detect during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, even if the same period as the interval period is continuously set as the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened, was the hit of the second special symbol included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect was confirmed? It is possible to make the player think that the gameability that is unknown is set. Therefore, a game can be performed in anticipation of shifting to the probability change mode until the door breakthrough mode effect is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 106, for the jackpot of the first special symbol, the range of the value “0-9” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “jackpot A4”. ”Is defined in association with“ big jackpot B4 ”, the range“ 20 to 89 ”is defined in association with“ big jackpot C4 ”, and the range of“ 90, 91 ”is“ big jackpot ”. “D4” is defined in association with it, and “big hit E4” is defined in association with the range of “92 to 99”. That is, in the “big hit B4” and the “big hit C4” in the five round big hit, the ratio of the “big hit C4” (special hit) is selected to be higher (seven times easier to select). . In addition, in the “big hit D4” and “big hit E4” of two round big hits, the ratio of “big hit E4” (special hit) is selected to be higher (5 times easier to select). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set the gameability that makes it easy to detect whether or not the door break mode effect is being performed. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, the game can be played while paying more attention to the operation of the specific winning opening 65a.

  The range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each of the big hits F4 to H4 is the same as that of the big hits D to F in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. .

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment is special to the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15 (a)). The difference is that a hitting hit table 202d8 and a special hitting loss table 202d9 are added.

  When the special win / hit table 202d8 is a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol within the range where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the special hit (big hit C4 or E4) is 4 times or less It is a data table to be referred to. Also, the special winning / losing table 202d9 is a case in which the special symbol executed after the special winning is finished falls within the second special symbol lottery within a range of 4 or less (small hit). It is a data table to be referred to. The details of the special hit / hit table 202d8 and the special hit / hit table 202d9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (b) and 107 (c).

  FIG. 107 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hitting hit table 202d8. As shown in FIG. 107 (b), in the special hit / hit table 202d8, the value “0” of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with “win middle fluctuation” having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. In the range of “1 to 198”, “winning short fluctuation” having a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined in association with each other. For this reason, if the winning of the second special symbol is a big win after the end of the special hit, the fluctuation time of 1 second is set with a high probability (198/199), but with a low probability (1/199). In some cases, a variation time of 3 seconds is set. For this reason, when the variation time of 3 seconds is set (the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a is 3 seconds), it is not determined that the lottery result is out of play (small win), but the big win There is also a possibility of becoming.

  FIG. 107 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hit / loss table 202d9. As shown in FIG. 107 (c), the special hit / miss table 202d9 corresponds to the “displacement middle fluctuation” having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds with respect to the value range “0 to 66” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, a range of “67 to 198” is defined in association with “out-of-range short fluctuation” having a fluctuation time of 1 second. For this reason, if the second special symbol is lost (small hit) after the special win, a variation time of 3 seconds is set at a rate of about 34% (67/199). That is, the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a is 3 seconds or more. As described above, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol after the special win, the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected only with a very low probability, so the fluctuation time is 3 seconds ( When the player recognizes that it has exceeded 1 second), the currently displayed variation display can be considered to have a high probability of variation display corresponding to the deviation. Therefore, it is possible to realize the gameability that the possibility of shifting to the probability variation mode can be predicted from the set fluctuation time during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 108, in the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment, a variation counter 203ca and a special hit flag 203cb are added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18). It is different in point.

  The fluctuation number counter 203ca is a counter that counts the number of special symbol fluctuation display (special symbol lottery) executed after the big hit. The initial value of the variation counter 203ca is set to 0, and is incremented by 1 each time the variation start timing of the special symbol is reached (see S2001 in FIG. 110 and S2201 in FIG. 112). In addition, when a special symbol lottery is won, the initial value is reset to 0 (see S253 in FIG. 109). When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, one data table for determining the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the value of the variation counter 203ca (FIG. 111). (See S2103 and S2109).

  The special after-hit flag 203cb is a flag indicating whether or not the previous big hit was a special hit (big hit C3 or E3). If this special hit-after flag 203cb is on, it means that the previous jackpot is a special hit, and if it is off, it means that the previous jackpot is not a special hit. This special hit flag 203cb has an initial value set to OFF, and is updated according to the jackpot type at the start of the jackpot (see S254 in FIG. 109). When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the special after-hit flag 203cb is referred to and one data table for determining the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. 111). (See S2105 and S2111). In the fourth embodiment, the special hit flag 203cb is updated when the start of the big hit is set. However, the special hit flag 203cb may be set when the big hit ends.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 109 to 112. First, with reference to FIG. 109, the special symbol variation process 4 (S131) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This special symbol fluctuation process 4 (S131) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

  Of the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28) is performed in each process of S201 to 212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221. ) Of S201 to 212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221 are executed.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S207 is completed, a special symbol 2 variation start process for starting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol is performed. This is executed (S251), and this process is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S251) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S212 is completed, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed (S252), and this process is terminated. Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S252) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result is a big hit (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off. At the same time, the fluctuation counter 203ca is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S253). Next, the special after-hit flag 203cb is updated according to the jackpot type won this time (S254), and the process proceeds to S220. In the processing of S254, the special winning flag 203cb is set to ON when the special winning (one of the big winnings C3 or E3) is won this time, and is set to OFF when it is another big winning type. By switching the state of the special hit flag 203cb according to the jackpot type, it is possible to switch the data table to be referenced for selecting the variation pattern according to the state of the special hit flag 203cb after the big hit. Therefore, if the special after-hit flag 203cb is on, when the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is referred to the special hit / hit table 202d8 and the special hit / hit table 202d9. Therefore, the gameability is set so that it can be relatively easily inferred whether or not the winning is based on the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a. Further, if the special winning flag 203cb is off, a gameability that is difficult to identify from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set whether the second special symbol lottery executed after the big win is won or missed. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the details of the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S251) will be described. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S251) is a process for starting the fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol as described above.

  In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 110), first, 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation counter 203ca and updated (S2001), and the execution area data of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired. (S2002). Next, the probability variation flag 203g is read, and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probability variation state (S2003). In this process of S2003, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is probable, and if the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state. In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (S2003: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S2002 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S2004). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with a first per-random number table (see FIG. 13B) for high probability. As described above, as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbols, 40 values of “0 to 39” are set, and the values of the first random number counter C1 and the random numbers that are the hits thereof coincide with each other. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S2006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variation state (the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S2003: No), the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S2002. And a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 13B) (S2005). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, “0 to 39”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S2006.

  And the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process for determining the fluctuation pattern of a 2nd special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S2004 or S2005 is performed (S2006). Details of this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) is finished, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) is set ( S2007). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 223f (S2008). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is set (S2009), and this process ends. These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the details of the above-described special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) will be described. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is a process for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol as described above.

  In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big win (S2101). If it is determined that it is a big hit (S2101: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation starts. Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the process (see FIG. 110), the display mode for the big hit is set (S2102). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 110) is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106). Determine what the jackpot type is. As mentioned above, if the second special symbol is a lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, it is a big hit F4 (16 rounds probable big hit) If it is in the range of “5 to 49”, it is determined that the jackpot is G4 (7 round normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is a jackpot H4 (6 round normal jackpot). Determination is made (see FIG. 106).

  In the processing of S2102, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit F4 to H4). In addition, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit F4 to H4) is set as the stop type.

  When the processing of S2102 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2103), and if it is 5 or more (S2103: Yes), from the variation pattern selection table 202d, the figure 2 The table 202d5 (5 fluctuations or more) is read (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2114.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2103 that the value of the variation counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2103: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is on (S2105), and the special hit flag is determined. If 203cb is on (S2105: Yes), the special hit table 202d8 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2114. If it is determined in the process of S2105 that the special hit flag 203cb is off (S2105: No), the special pattern 2 per table (not more than 4 fluctuations) 202d4 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d ( (S2107), the process proceeds to S2114.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the current special symbol lottery result is out (S2101: No), first, the display mode at the time of out is set (S2108). In the process of S2108, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As a stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether the reach is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2109). If it is determined that it is 5 or more (S2109: Yes), the variation pattern selection table 202d is out of the special figure 2 (5 variations or more). ) Table 202d7 is read (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2114. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2109: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is on (S2111), and the special hit If the flag 203cb is on (S2111: Yes), the special hit / loss table 202d9 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2112), and the process proceeds to S2114. If it is determined in the process of S2111 that the special after-hit flag 203cb is off (S2111: No), the special figure 2 off (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2113). ), The process proceeds to S2114.

  In the process of S2114, the lottery result of this special symbol is obtained based on the data table read by any of the processes of S2104, S2106, S2107, S2110, S2112 and S2113 and the value of the variation type counter CS1. The fluctuation pattern to be shown is determined (S2114), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the details of the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S252) will be described. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S252) is a process for starting the fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol as described above.

  Among these special figure 1 fluctuation start processes (see FIG. 112), in each process of S2201 to S2205, and S2214 to S2216, S2001 to S2005 and S2007 to S of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 110) described above, respectively. The same processes as those in S2009 are executed.

  In the special figure 1 variation start process (see FIG. 112), when the process of S2204 or S2205 is completed, it is then determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired in the process of S2204 or S2205 is a big hit ( If it is determined that it is a big hit (S2206: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 (S2207). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106) to determine what the big hit type is. As described above, if the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 9”, it is a big hit A4 (16 rounds probable big hit) If it is determined that it is in the range of “10 to 19”, it is determined that the jackpot is B4 (5-round probability variation jackpot). If it is determined that it is in the range of “90, 91”, it is determined that the jackpot is D4 (2-round probability variation jackpot). Determination is made (see FIG. 106).

  In the process of S2207, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A4 to E4). In addition, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A4 to E4) is set as the stop type. When the processing of S2207 ends, the special chart 1 table 202d1 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2208), and the process proceeds to S2213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is out (S2206: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S2209). In the processing of S2209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Next, it is determined from the state of the probability variation flag 203g whether the special symbol is in a certain variation state (S2210). If it is determined that the certain symbol variation state is in effect (S2210: Yes), the variation pattern selection table 202d is out of the special pattern 1. The (probability change) table 202d3 is read (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2210 that the special symbol is not in the state of certainty change (S2210: No), the special figure 1 off (normal) table 202d2 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2212), and the process The process proceeds to S2213.

  In the process of S2213, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the data table read by any of the processes of S2208, S2211, or S2212, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S2213), and the process proceeds to S2214. To do.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the type of jackpot that allows the player to easily detect whether or not the result of the variation display of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot is ended, It is configured to provide a jackpot of a type that is difficult to detect. More specifically, if the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot is out of play, the jackpot type (special hit) in which the variation time of a period different from the jackpot interval period of the second special symbol is easily selected And a jackpot type that is difficult to select. Thereby, after the end of the special win, the player can guess whether or not the lottery result is out of focus by paying attention to the opening operation of the open / close door 65f1. That is, it is possible to cause the player to predict the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode before the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is notified. On the other hand, after the big hit other than the special hit is completed, it is determined from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 whether the opening / closing operation is due to continuous small hits or the opening / closing operation is due to the big hit G4 or H4. It becomes difficult. As a result, depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to determine whether or not the second special symbol hit is included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is confirmed, and whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect has been executed. It is possible to switch between easy-to-detect gameability. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in this 4th embodiment, when it loses by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol after special hit (small hit), it is longer than the big hit interval period (1 second) of the 2nd special symbol (3 seconds) However, the fluctuation time (that is, the interval until the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened when it comes off) is limited to this. It is not a thing. It may be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the player can determine that a period different from the interval period is set. For example, a variation time of 0.1 seconds may be easily set. With this configuration, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed at an apparently short interval, so it is highly likely that the opening / closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 for the player is a small hit. Can be thought of. Therefore, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 65f1. In addition to the opening / closing door 65f1, a variable member capable of variable operation is provided, and depending on whether the variable member is operated after a special hit or a big hit other than a special hit. It is good also as a structure made to differ.

  In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 that is disadvantageous to the player when the second special symbol lottery is won is premised. However, when the player wins the second special symbol lottery, the player You may apply with respect to the pachinko machine 10 which becomes advantageous. By configuring in this way, after the jackpot ends, as the number of times the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened at intervals of 1 second continues, the expectation that an advantageous second special symbol jackpot will be increased. It is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1.

  In the fourth embodiment, a configuration is provided in which a jackpot type that is likely to be different between a case where the variable operation mode of the open / close door 65f1 after the jackpot is ended and a case of a jackpot and a jackpot type that is likely to have the same variable operation are provided. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which provides the jackpot type which is easy to be different in the aspect of the production performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the case of losing, and the case of jackpot, and the jackpot type which is easy to correspond. Also, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, if the special symbol lottery is missed, the probability of winning a small hit (that is, the door 65f1 will be unlocked for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds)) is different. It is good also as a structure to allow. Thereby, a game can be performed in anticipation that the opening / closing door 65f1 will not be opened (that is, it will be detached).

  The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be done.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, a transition is made to an unfavorable state (normal mode) before all lotteries based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol that are executed after the big hit are completed. Although it was set as the structure which alert | reports whether it had been by the door breakthrough mode effect, it is not restricted to this. Regardless of whether or not it is a holding ball of the second special symbol, after the jackpot ends, whether the door has shifted to an unfavorable state (or advantageous) within a predetermined number of special symbol lottery, It is good also as a structure alert | reported by breakthrough mode production. Specifically, for example, each time the special symbol lottery timing is reached in the special symbol probabilistic state, the special symbol lottery is shifted (falls) to a low-probability state without going through a jackpot. Applying the door breakthrough mode effect to the pachinko machine 10 having a specification for performing a lottery of whether or not with a predetermined probability (for example, a fall probability corresponding to a fall is more advantageous) Also good. That is, in the case of a big hit that shifts to a probable change state, for example, the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed until 100 special symbol lotteries are finished after the big hit. And if it falls to the low probability state of a special symbol within 100 times, it is good also as composition which performs the production which fails to break through the door, and if it has not fallen, performs the production which succeeds in breaking through the door. . Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 having a specification in which the number of lotteries for which the probability variation state is set is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 130 after the big hit), the big hit is made within the range of the number of lotteries for which the probability variation state is set. It is good also as a structure which suggests (notifies | reports) whether the probability change state has been complete | finished by door breakthrough mode production. More specifically, if a big hit is made during the probable change state, it is suggested that the player is advantageous (executes an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door), and a predetermined number of times (130 If the lottery lottery has ended, it may be suggested that the player is disadvantaged (execution of an effect that fails to break through the door). Furthermore, in this case, the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed over the entire period in which the probability variation state is set, or for a certain period (for example, the number of lotteries after the big hit is 125 or more). It is good also as composition which performs door break mode production only.

  In addition, for example, as a gaming state after a big hit, a special symbol probability change state until the next big hit, and a big hit type (big hit a) that becomes a short time state of a normal symbol, and a special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) In the pachinko machine 10 of the specification in which the special symbol low probability state until the end and the jackpot type (big hit b) set to the short time state of the normal symbol is provided at least, the winning jackpot is Whether the jackpot a or jackpot b is indistinguishable (difficult) from the production etc., after the jackpot, until a predetermined number of times (100 times) lottery is executed, It is good also as a structure which alert | reports the game state set after the last jackpot by the door breakthrough mode production. In other words, if the gaming state is a special symbol probable change state and a normal symbol time-short state, an effect that suggests that the player is in an advantageous state (an effect that breaks through the door) is executed. If the low probability state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol, an effect that suggests that the player is in an unfavorable state (effect that fails to break through the door) may be executed. In addition, for example, in the special symbol lottery, a small hit is made with a lower probability than a loss, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a when a certain probability variation jackpot (big hit c) is determined is equivalent to the small win ( The door breakthrough mode effect may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the same or a specification in which the player has only a difference that cannot be distinguished by the player. In other words, it is difficult to determine which lottery result is obtained depending on the production, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, or the like in the case of a small hit and in the case of a big win c. And, for example, in a low probability state of a special symbol, a configuration in which the state is notified by door break mode effect after a special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after a small hit or big hit c It is good. In other words, if the small probability and the low probability state of the special symbol is maintained, an effect suggesting that the player is in an unfavorable state (effect that fails to break through the door) is executed, and the jackpot c is obtained. As long as the state has shifted to the probable change state of the special symbol, it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state (an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door).

  In each said embodiment, it was set as the structure which alert | reports whether it is an advantageous state (mode) by door break-through mode effect, However, The content to alert | report (improve) by door break-through mode effect is not necessarily restricted to a mode. . For example, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports by a door breakthrough mode effect | production whether the effect aspect is changed. More specifically, for example, it may be configured to notify the door break-through mode effect of whether or not to develop a highly reliable reach effect, whether or not to develop to the next step in a so-called continuous effect.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to the upper limit number (4) at the end of the jackpot, but is not limited to after the jackpot ends. Applicable if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to the upper limit in a state different from the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), for example, the end of the probability variation state You may comprise so that the holding | maintenance ball | bowl of a 2nd special symbol may become an upper limit at the time or completion | finish of a time-short state. In addition, for example, it is configured to provide a state where it is likely to be a small hit (a lottery probability is high or a lottery condition is easily established), a state where a small hit is difficult (a lottery probability is low or a lottery condition is difficult to be established), It is good also as a structure applied with respect to the state where it is easy to make a small hit.

  In each of the above embodiments, the second entrance 640 and the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) are provided on the right side of the game board 13, but the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) during the big hit. The ball may be changed to an arbitrary arrangement as long as the ball launched toward the ball can enter the second entrance 640. Also, the ball launched toward the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) during the jackpot is difficult to enter the first entrance 64, but the first entrance 64 during the jackpot. The ball may be configured to be able to enter the ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Gameability that is more advantageous if there is no reserved run)
First discriminating information based on the first ball entering means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter, and the game ball entering the first ball entering means. First discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired, and first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means are different from the first direction. Based on the second ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction is easy to enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means, the second discrimination information is obtained. Second discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired, second discrimination means for executing second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination information acquisition means After the second discrimination information is acquired by the above, based on the acquired second discrimination information Until the second determination is executed, the determination information storage means capable of storing the second determination information with the predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the position where the game ball launched in the second direction is easy to enter And a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state, and a game ball in the variable ball entry means Based on the result of the determination by the privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the ball entered and the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means, the variable entry A variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times; a game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game executing means is terminated; A second game that is more advantageous to the player than one game state Gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a state, wherein the gaming state setting means is more than the specific determination result by the first determination means. The ratio of setting the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is higher when the second determination means gives the specific determination result. A gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter, and the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. Based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition unit, the first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination unit. Based on the fact that the second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction is easy to enter, and the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Then, the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. Based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination is executed by the second discrimination means. After the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination information is stored by the discrimination information storage means until the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information is executed. The predetermined number of information is stored as an upper limit. A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball, the game ball launched in the second direction enters It is arranged at the position where it is easy to do. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the variable pitching unit. A variable game in which the variable pitching means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on the result of the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. . Among the plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game executing means is completed. To 1 gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The first gaming state after the execution of the variable game by the gaming state setting means is the first gaming state that is the specific judgment result by the second discriminating means, rather than the specific discrimination result by the first discriminating means. The ratio of setting becomes high.

  Thus, when a game ball is launched in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege during execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the second discrimination information is stored. . When a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information, since the ratio set to the first gaming state having a lower advantage than the second gaming state is high, it is stored during execution of the variable game. In the second determination based on the second determination information, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the hope that a specific determination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be realized.

  In the gaming machine A1, a plurality of variable patterns of the variable ball entry means include at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Variable pattern setting means for setting any one of the variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means is more preferable than the second variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means. The ratio of setting the first variable pattern is high, and the ratio of setting the second variable pattern is higher than that of the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means. Is set by the variable pattern setting means. When the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means, the ratio of setting the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting unit is higher than that of the first variable pattern.

  As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means, it is easy to set the second variable pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable entry means, so that the variable game is being executed. In the second determination based on the second determination information stored in, there is an effect that it can be more strongly expected that a specific determination result will not be obtained.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, based on the start of the variable game, a variable ball of the variable ball entry means is a first variable pattern, and a game ball in the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Is provided with variable pattern setting means for setting any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that is difficult to enter, and during the period from the start of the first variable pattern to the end of the game ball When it continues to be fired in the second direction, it is configured with a period longer than at least the period until the predetermined number of pieces of the second determination information is acquired by the second determination information acquisition means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable pitching means, the first variable pattern and the second variable that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable pitching means than the first variable pattern. Any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start of the first variable pattern to the end, when the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction, the second determination information of the predetermined number of pieces of information is acquired by the second determination information acquisition means. The period is at least longer than the period until.

  As a result, during the execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, if the player continues to fire the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege, at least a second number of information equal to or greater than the predetermined number of information. The discrimination information is acquired. Therefore, after the end of the variable game, the second determination of the upper limit number is executed each time. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the hope that all the second determinations of the upper limit number do not result in a specific determination result.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination unit is executed in preference to the first determination by the first determination unit. Game machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination means is executed preferentially over the first determination by the first determination means. Even if the game ball enters the first ball entry means in a state where the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means, it is possible to suppress the first discrimination from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that attention can be paid by the second determination.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a first flow path in which the game ball launched in the second direction is disposed at a position where the game ball can be reached, and the reached game ball is provided with the second ball entry means And a game machine A5, characterized in that the game machine A5 is provided with a distribution means for distributing to the second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first flow path provided with the second ball entry means, and the second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means Since the distribution means for distributing the game balls to each other is arranged at a position where the game balls launched in the second direction can be reached, the flow-down direction of the game balls launched in the second direction is biased. There is an effect that it can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine A5, the distributing means distributes game balls alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path, and the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the sorting means, so that during the execution of the variable game, The balls can be alternately entered into the second entrance means and the variable entrance means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game balls launched in the second direction from entering the second entrance means or the variable entrance means in a biased manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a first position where the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means, and a game ball enters the first ball entry means compared to the first position. Variable means capable of changing to a second position where it is difficult to make a ball, and variable control means for controlling a variable operation of the variable means. In the first gaming state, the variable means causes the variable means to The second gaming state is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first gaming state. Game machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first position where the gaming ball easily enters the first entering means, and the first position compared to the first position. The variable means changes to the second position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first gaming state, it is difficult for the variable means to be changed to the first position by the variable control means, and in the second gaming state, the variable means is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first gaming state. .

  Accordingly, in the first gaming state, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, so that the game ball can easily enter the first entry means. Therefore, since the game can be performed more efficiently in the first game state, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the first game state will be entered.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the first gaming state is such that the probability that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means is set to the first probability. Yes, the second gaming state is set such that a probability that the specific determination result is determined by the first determination means and the determination by the second determination means is a second probability lower than the first probability. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first gaming state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination unit and the second determination unit is set as the first probability. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination unit and the second determination unit is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

  As a result, in the first gaming state, the probability of a specific determination result is higher than in the second gaming state, so that after the variable game is finished, the variable game is easily executed again with a relatively small number of determinations. Therefore, in the first gaming state, it is expected that more predetermined benefits can be obtained in a relatively short period of time, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Characteristic B group> (A specific effect is executed using a jackpot ending period and a reserved digest period)
A discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition; a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of discrimination by the discriminating means; and the bonus A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the game execution means is completed A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among the states, a dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determining means, and predetermined during execution of the privilege game Based on the establishment of the specific condition, until the end of the bonus game and the dynamic display of one or more of the identification information executed after the bonus game ends Specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a period, and the specific effect can indicate to the player whether or not the gaming state after the specific effect is ended is the second gaming state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by being a production.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the discrimination means is executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. Executed by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. One gaming state among the states is set by the gaming state setting means. Identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the execution of the special game, the period until the special game ends and the dynamic display of one or more pieces of identification information executed after the special game ends. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means during the period until the end of the. The specific effect includes an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the game state after the specific effect is ended is the second game state.

  As a result, the specific effect can be executed over a period from when the specific condition is satisfied until the dynamic display of one or more pieces of identification information ends, so the period until the privilege game simply ends Alternatively, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of one identification information.

  In the gaming machine B1, the specific effect executing means, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second gaming state, the specific effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second gaming state, the specific effect is based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. Is executed by the specific effect execution means, so that the second game state is suggested in the specific effect unless the specific result of the determination is made during execution of the specific effect and the transition to the first game state is made. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed in the expectation that a specific determination result is not obtained during execution of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means Until the determination condition for the acquired determination information is satisfied, the determination information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the determination information storage means is stored based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. Determining means for determining whether or not the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result is included in the determination information, and determining the effect mode of the specific effect based on the determination result by the determination means An effect mode determining means, wherein the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. Game machine B3 to.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination unit is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit based on a predetermined specific opportunity, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit is discriminated with respect to the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the predetermined number of information is stored as an upper limit by the discrimination information storage means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the determination unit determines whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage unit includes the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result. Based on the determination result by the determining means, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determining means. The specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining unit is executed by the specific effect executing unit.

  Thereby, since the determination result by the determination means can be determined in advance, there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode according to the determination result actually executed by the determination means.

  In the gaming machine B3, as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a first privilege game in which a game state after execution is set to the first game state by the game state setting means; The determination means comprises: a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game whose game state after execution is set to the second game state; Determines whether the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means includes discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game, and the effect mode determination means includes the determination An effect state suggesting that the game state after the end of the specific effect is the first game state based on the fact that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included by the means And characterized in that to determine the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is finished is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and after the execution is finished One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types of privilege games including at least the second privilege game in which the game state is set to the second game state. It is determined by the determination means whether the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game. An effect mode that suggests that the game state after the end of the specific effect is the first game state based on the determination means determining that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included. It is determined by the aspect determining means.

  Accordingly, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows a game to be played in the expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the specific effect is set such that a predetermined specific period is set as an effect period regardless of the effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the specific period set in advance is set as the specific production stage regardless of the production mode. Thus, it becomes difficult to predict the result of the specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the result of the specific effect to the end.

  In the gaming machine B5, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information based on a determination result by the determining means, and the specific game is performed after the specific condition is satisfied. The dynamic display period determining unit determines the period until the end of the period and the determination by the determining unit a predetermined number of times are all different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine B6, which is the sum of the dynamic display periods for a specific number of times.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit based on the determination result by the determination unit. The dynamic display period is determined when the period from when the specific condition is satisfied until the bonus game ends and when the predetermined number of determinations by the determination means are all different from the specific determination result. The sum with the specific number of dynamic display periods determined by the means is set as the specific period.

  Thereby, since the specific effect can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for the specific number of times ends, there is an effect that the specific effect can be ended clearly.

  In the gaming machine B6, the dynamic display period determination means, at least until the specific period ends, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means within the specific number of times after the bonus game ends. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that a period longer than the remaining period is determined as the dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, after the end of the bonus game, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means within a specific number of times, at least the remaining until the specific period ends Since a period longer than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, when a specific determination result is obtained within a specific number of times, a bonus game is made before the specific period ends. Can be prevented from starting. Therefore, since the bonus game is started before the end of the specific effect, it is possible to prevent the result of the specific effect from being known in advance.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, there is provided an expectation suggestion effect execution means for executing an effect indicating an expectation level for the second game state being suggested by the specific effect during execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine B8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B7, an effect suggesting an expectation degree for the second gaming state being suggested by the specific effect during the execution of the privilege game is an expectation suggestion effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an impression as if the effect mode during execution of the privilege game and the specific effect are a series of effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the privilege game.

<Characteristic C group> (Make it difficult to determine whether or not a pending run occurs from the action of the attacker)
A privilege entry means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering, a first position where the game ball can enter the privilege entry means, and a game more than the first position. Based on the variable means for changing to the second position where the ball is difficult to enter, the determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination by the determination means being the first determination result. The first variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in the first variable mode, and the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result. Based on the gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state different from the gaming state at the time when the determination is executed and the determination result by the determination means, the second determination result is obtained. All the discrimination by the discrimination means is the first The variable means is controlled to be variable in a second variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode of the specific number of times executed when the determination result is And a second variable control means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege entry means based on the entry of the game ball, and the first position at which the game ball can enter the privilege entry means, The variable means changes to the second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable control means is configured so that the variable means is varied in the first variable mode based on the fact that the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition and the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Controlled by. Based on the determination result by the determination means being the second determination result, it is distinguished from the specific variable number of first variable modes executed when all the determinations by the specific number of determination means become the first determination result. In a second variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult, the second variable control unit controls the variable unit to be variable.

  This makes it difficult to distinguish from the variable mode of the variable means whether the first determination result or the second determination result, so whether or not a different gaming state has been set. There is an effect that it can be made difficult to be discriminated by a person.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming state setting means can set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the determination result by the determination means is the second determination result, the ratio for setting the second gaming state is set higher than the ratio for setting the first gaming state. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the determination result by the determination means is the second determination result, the ratio at which the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means is set higher than the ratio at which the first gaming state is set.

  Accordingly, when the second determination result is obtained, an unfavorable second gaming state is easily set, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the first determination result is obtained.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the ratio that becomes the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means is set higher than the ratio that becomes the other discrimination result.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the ratio that becomes the first determination result by the determination by the determination means is set higher than the ratio that becomes the other determination result. There is a high possibility that the first determination result is continuously obtained over the number of times. Therefore, even when the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode as the second determination result, it can be thought that the first determination result may have continued for a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not a different game state is set.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the determination unit executes determination when one of a first determination condition and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. The gaming state setting means sets a high ratio for setting the first gaming state when the second determination result is obtained based on the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the determination result based on establishment results in the second determination result, the ratio of setting the second gaming state which is disadvantageous to the first gaming state is set higher. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination unit executes the determination when either the first determination condition or the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. When the determination result based on the establishment of the first determination condition results in the second determination result, the ratio at which the first game state is set by the game state setting means is set high. On the other hand, when the second determination result is obtained based on the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the ratio of setting the second gaming state that is disadvantageous to the first gaming state is set higher.

  As a result, when the determination result based on the establishment of the first determination condition results in the second determination result, the first game state having a higher advantage than the second game state is easily set. A game can be played in the hope that it will be established. Therefore, there is an effect that when the determination by the determination unit is executed, attention can be paid to the type of the determination condition that triggered the determination.

  In the gaming machine C4, when the determination result by the determination means is the second determination result, and the first game state is set by the gaming state setting means, the bonus entry means is more than the second variable mode. A gaming machine C5, comprising third variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable in a third variable manner in which a game ball can easily enter.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, and when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, than the second variable mode. Since it is controlled by the third variable control means so that the variable means is variable in a third variable mode in which a game ball can easily enter the bonus entry means, the second determination is made based on the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition. When the result is obtained, the degree of advantage can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the first determination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, a first ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction are A second ball entry means arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball, and the first determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, The second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the privilege ball entry means is provided with a game ball launched in the second direction. A gaming machine C6, which is provided at a position where it is easy to ball.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter, while the second ball is placed at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction is easy to enter. A ball entry means and a bonus ball entry means are provided. The first discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first entrance means, whereas the second discrimination condition is based on the game ball entering the second entrance means. Is established.

  As a result, when the bonus entry means is changed to the first position, when a game is launched in the second direction in order to obtain a prescribed bonus, the game ball enters the second entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is easily performed after the bonus entry means is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine C6, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance means, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information acquisition means The gaming machine C7, further comprising: discrimination information storage means capable of storing at least the discrimination information up to a predetermined number of information until the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the second entrance means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is With the predetermined number of information as an upper limit, it is stored at least by the discrimination information storage means until discrimination by the discrimination means is executed.

  As a result, the discrimination information storage means can store the discrimination information used for discrimination when the entrance to the second entrance means is detected in a situation where discrimination by the discrimination means cannot be started. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the entrance into the second entrance means from being wasted.

  In any one of the gaming machines C4 to C7, the determination executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is performed in preference to the determination executed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. A gaming machine C8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C4 to C7, the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is based on the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. Therefore, when the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is executed, the result of the determination can be focused.

<Characteristic D group> (A configuration in which a special start prize is easily generated during a big hit, and is difficult to occur in normal times)
First discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the first discrimination condition, Second discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the first discrimination Or a bonus game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the second determining means, and the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means. The type determination for determining the type of one award game from among a plurality of types including at least a first award game and a second award game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first award game. And a first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be established based on a result of the determination by the means and the first determination means or the second determination means. End condition is State setting means for setting a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be established as compared to the first state based on the standing, and the type determination means is determined by the second determination means. The ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the specific determination result is determined by the first determination means than when the specific determination result is determined. Game machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. Is done. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the scoring game execution means based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a type from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. The type of one privilege game is determined by the determining means. The state setting unit sets a first state in which the second determination condition is easily established based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination unit or the second determination unit. On the other hand, based on the fact that the award game end condition is satisfied, the state setting means sets a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state. The type determining means is configured so that the ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the specific determination result is determined by the first determining means than when the specific determination result is determined by the second determining means. It is configured.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the 2nd distinction conditions are satisfied in states other than during execution of a privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to limit the opportunity to execute the first privilege game with a low degree of advantage.

  In the gaming machine D1, based on the establishment of the second determination condition, determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information for use in determination by the second determination means, and the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means And a discrimination information storage means for storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the second determination condition, determination information for use in determination by the second determination unit is acquired by the determination information acquisition unit. Until the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, it is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information.

  Thus, when the second determination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the determination by the second determination means is performed, the plurality of determination information acquired in response to the satisfaction of the plurality of second determination conditions. Is stored by the determination information storage means, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the determination is not executed even though the second determination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine D2, the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means during execution of the privilege game, and based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, after the bonus game ends. A gaming machine D3 that is configured to execute discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D2, the bonus is obtained by the second discriminating means based on the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means during the execution of the bonus game and stored in the discriminating information storage means. Since the determination is executed after the game ends, the opportunity for the determination by the second determination means can be concentrated after the bonus game ends. Therefore, after the bonus game is over, the game can be performed in the hope that no specific determination result will be obtained by the determination by the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the game ball entering, and a first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means, The variable means is variable from the first position to the second position, and the variable means can be changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that a specific determination condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that it is determined by the specific determination means that the first position is changed to the second position, the variable means is changed to the second position. Variable control means for controlling the specific determination means in the second state than in the case where it is determined that the variable determination means is variable by the specific determination means in the second state. The variable means is variable by Gaming machine D4 which is better when it is determined that the cause, wherein said varying means is used to control such a period for varying longer in the second position.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the entrance means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. Based on the establishment of the specific determination condition, the specific determination unit determines whether the variable unit is changed from the first position to the second position. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means so as to change the variable means to the second position based on the fact that the specific determination means determines that the first position is changed to the second position. The variable means is in the second position when it is determined that the variable means is varied by the specific determination means in the second state, rather than when it is determined that the variable means is variable in the second state. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes long.

  Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, in the first state, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily established than in the second state.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on a game ball entering, and a first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means, The variable means is variable from the first position to the second position, and the variable means can be changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that a specific determination condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that it is determined by the specific determination means that the first position is changed to the second position, the variable means is changed to the second position. Variable control means for controlling in such a way that the period from the start of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means to the end thereof tends to be shorter in the first state than in the second state. A gaming machine D5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the entrance means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. Based on the establishment of the specific determination condition, the specific determination unit determines whether the variable unit is changed from the first position to the second position. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means so as to change the variable means to the second position based on the fact that the specific determination means determines that the first position is changed to the second position. The first state is configured to be shorter in the first state than in the second state from the start of the determination of 1 by the specific determination unit to the end thereof.

  Thereby, the period required for the specific determination means to determine the same number of times is shorter in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, since the opportunity to change the variable means to the second position can be obtained more times, there is an effect that it is possible to easily enter the game ball in the first state.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means that is provided in a specific flow path and satisfies the second determination condition based on the game ball entering, and the game ball is difficult to flow down the specific flow path The opening / closing means that can be changed between a closed state that closes to be in an open state and an open state that allows the game ball to flow down, and the opening / closing means are set to the open state based on the fact that the first state has been reached. And an opening / closing control means for setting the closed state based on the second state.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific flow path is provided with a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the game ball having entered. The opening / closing means is varied between a closed state in which the specific ball is closed so that it is difficult for the game ball to flow down and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. The opening / closing means is set to the open state by the opening / closing control means based on the first state, and the opening / closing means is set to the closed state by the opening / closing control means based on the second state. .

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the second determination condition from being established in the second state.

  In the gaming machine D6, the opening / closing means is configured to be able to stop a specific number of game balls on the upstream side of the opening / closing means when set in the closed state. Machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D6, when the opening / closing means is set in a closed state, a specific number of gaming balls can be stopped upstream of the opening / closing means. Therefore, when it is set to the open state, the game ball that has been stopped can be entered into the entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily established in the first state in which the open state is set.

<Characteristic E group> (The information corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the specific performance is included in the fluctuation pattern command from the main to the sub)
In a gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying an effect mode, main control means for performing main control relating to a game, and slave control means for performing control related to a game based on a command output from the main control means The main control means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and a determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. Privilege game executing means, dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, and movement in dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means The dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time, the information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and the information corresponding to the dynamic display time are different. Command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least specific information to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means outputs the dynamic display time output by the command output means. Command receiving means for receiving a command, dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time based on reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means, and a predetermined specific condition Based on the establishment of the specific presentation execution means for executing, in the display means, a specific presentation that can be executed over one or a plurality of the dynamic display times, and the specification included in the dynamic display time command Based on the information, the specific effect end determining means for determining whether or not to end the specific effect, and the specific effect by the specific effect end determining means In the event that it is determined to end, until the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination, A gaming machine E1 comprising a specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A dynamic display time command including at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is received by the command output means. It is output to the slave control means. In the sub control means, the dynamic display time command output by the command output means is received by the command receiving means, and the dynamic display time is dynamically determined based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means. It is specified by the display time specifying means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, a specific effect that can be executed over one or a plurality of dynamic display times is executed on the display unit by the specific effect executing unit. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, whether or not to end the specific effect is determined by the specific effect end determination means. The dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means ends based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination when the specific effect is determined to end by the specific effect end determining means. In the meantime, the specific effect is ended by the specific effect main hot water amount means.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a specific production can be ended suitably.

  In the gaming machine E1, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be ended by the specific effect end determination means, the specific effect is determined based on information according to the determination result by the determination means included in the dynamic display time command. An amusement machine E2 comprising an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the effect ending means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be ended by the specific effect end determining unit, the determination result by the determining unit included in the dynamic display time command is used. Based on the information, the effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the specific effect end means is determined by the effect mode determination means, so that the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the determination means. . Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode of the specific effect can be set appropriately.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the slave control means is included in the dynamic display time command when the power-on discriminating means for discriminating the power-on to the gaming machine and when the power-on discriminating means discriminates the power-on. On the basis of the specific information, the interruption time determining means for determining whether or not the time point when the power of the gaming machine is cut off is being executed, and execution of the specific effect by the interruption time determining means A gaming machine E3, comprising: a post-throwing effect executing means for executing the specific effect based on being determined to be in the middle.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, in the slave control means, the power-on determining means determines that the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and the power-on determining means determines that the power is turned on. In addition, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, it is determined by the shut-off time determining means whether or not the time point when the power of the gaming machine is shut off is being executed. Based on the fact that the specific effect is being executed by the shut-off time determining means, the specific effect is executed by the post-input effect executing means.

  As a result, even if the power is shut off during execution of the specific effect, the specific effect can be resumed, so that the effect mode is different before and after the power is turned off, and the player is prevented from being confused. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine E3, the specific effect ending means ends the specific effect executed by the post-input effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3, the specific effect executed by the post-input effect executing means is terminated by the specific effect ending means. Even if it is a case where it is interrupted | blocked, there exists an effect that a specific effect can be ended suitably.

  In the gaming machine E4, the specific effect executing means sets a predetermined specific period as an effect period of the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E5, the specific period predetermined by the specific effect execution means is set as the specific effect effect period. There is an effect that can be set by.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the main control means acquires the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquisition means acquires the discrimination information. Discrimination information storage means capable of storing at least the discrimination information up to a predetermined number of information until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the command output means stores the discrimination information in the discrimination information storage means An information number command including information corresponding to the number of information of the discriminated information is output to the sub-control unit, and the specific effect executing unit is configured to output the discriminating information included in the information number command. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times less than or equal to the number of information.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit is stored in at least the discrimination information storage unit until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. An information count command including information corresponding to the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is output to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means over the dynamic display of the identification information whose number is less than or equal to the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information included in the information number command.

  As a result, the specific effect can be executed within a range equal to or smaller than the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, so that the specific display is performed even though the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed. There is an effect that the continuation of the production can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E6, the information according to the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information is from when the specific condition is satisfied until all discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage unit is completed. A gaming machine E7, comprising information according to the number of information of the remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E6, all the discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is satisfied is determined according to the number of pieces of discrimination information. Since it is composed of information corresponding to the number of pieces of information of the remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, the specific effect is more reliably stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that it can be executed within the range of the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information.

<Characteristic F group> (Variability of special drawing lottery on the disadvantaged side is varied according to the winning symbol)
First discriminating information based on the first ball entering means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter, and the game ball entering the first ball entering means. The first discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired, the first discrimination information for executing the first discrimination using the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the first direction Second discriminating information based on the second ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a different second direction is easy to enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the second discrimination information, and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination is likely to be a disadvantageous discrimination result than the first discrimination. Second discriminating means to execute, and the second discriminating information acquired by the second discriminating information acquiring unit. Is advantageous to the player on the basis of the discrimination information storage means that can store the predetermined number of information as an upper limit and the discrimination result by the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means. It is advantageous to launch a game ball in the first direction over the second direction at least for a predetermined period as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means and the privilege game executing means. One of the award games out of a plurality of types including a first privilege game that is easy and a second privilege game in which it is more advantageous to fire a game ball in the second direction than in the first direction in the predetermined period. A game machine F1, comprising: a type determining means for determining the type of the game machine.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a winning. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). Also, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous by changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have a difference in degree. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter. First discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the first entrance means, and the first discrimination information acquired by the first information acquisition means is used. The first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means. The second ball entry means is disposed at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction is easy to enter. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means, the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. Using the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition unit, the second discrimination unit executes a second discrimination that tends to be a disadvantageous discrimination result than the first discrimination. The second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition unit is stored in the discrimination information storage unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Based on the result of the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, at least a first privilege game in which it is more advantageous to fire a game ball in the first direction than the second direction in a predetermined period, and in the first direction in a predetermined period. Also, the type determining means determines one type of privilege game from a plurality of types including the second privilege game that is more advantageous when the game ball is launched in the second direction.

  Thereby, since the 1st privilege game which becomes advantageous by launching a game ball in the 1st direction is difficult to perform the 2nd distinction which tends to become a disadvantageous discrimination result, the 1st privilege game and the 2nd privilege The difference in the degree of advantage from the game can be increased. Therefore, since it can be expected that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, when a specific determination result is obtained, it is possible to make the game pay attention by the type of the privilege game. There is.

  In the gaming machine F1, the first ball that is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter and can be varied between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter. A variable ball entry means and a game ball launched in the second direction are arranged at a position where the game ball can easily enter, and the game ball can be varied between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter. Two variable entry means, and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the first variable entry means or the second variable entry means, The first privilege game is more easily changed to a state in which the first variable entry means can enter the ball than the second variable entry means, and the second privilege game is the first privilege game. A gaming machine characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state in which a ball can be entered than a game. 2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first variable entry means that can be changed between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult to enter the game ball is disposed at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter. Has been. A second variable entry means that can change between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is disposed at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter. Yes. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the first variable pitching means or the second variable pitching means. The first privilege game is more easily changed to a state in which the first variable entry means can enter than the second variable entry means. The second privilege game is more easily changed to a state in which the second variable entry means can enter than the first privilege game.

  Thereby, during execution of the privilege game, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the launched game ball enters the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. is there.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming state after the bonus game is ended is 1 out of a plurality including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state of the first gaming state after the bonus game executed based on the fact that the specific judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the second judging means. A gaming machine F3, wherein a ratio set as a subsequent gaming state is higher than that in the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. That is, as a gaming state after the bonus game is finished, one gaming state is a gaming state among a plurality including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. It is set by setting means. In the first gaming state, the ratio set as the gaming state after the award game executed based on the fact that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discriminating means is higher than that in the second gaming state. It is comprised so that it may become.

  Thereby, when the determination by the second determination means is executed, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in the hope that a specific determination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state as a ratio of setting the second gaming state as the gaming state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game is finished. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is higher than the percentage to be played.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F3, the proportion of the first gaming state set as the gaming state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game is ended is that the first gaming state is Since it is configured to be higher than the set ratio, a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination executed based on the fact that the game ball is fired in the second direction in a predetermined period, and the first gaming state Can make a player think that he wants to avoid being set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific determination result is not obtained in the second determination after the end of the second privilege game.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, and the suggestion executed by the suggestion effect execution means As an effect, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, a first suggesting effect or a second suggesting effect different from the first suggesting effect is determined, and the type determining means A suggestion effect determining means for determining the first suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined, the gaming machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are produced. That is, the suggestion effect suggesting the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. As the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect different from the first suggestion effect is suggested. It is determined by production determining means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the first suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination means.

  Thereby, when the second suggestion effect is executed, it is determined that the game is the first privilege game, so that the game can be performed in anticipation that the second suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect. There is an effect. In addition, since the first suggestion effect may be executed even in the first privilege game, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the game can be performed in anticipation of being the first privilege game. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine F5, when the first suggestion effect is executed on the basis of the fact that the first privilege game is determined by the type determination unit, the suggestion effect execution unit executes the first suggestion effect after the end of the first suggestion effect. A gaming machine F6 that executes the second suggestion effect.

  According to gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by gaming machine F5, when the first suggestion effect is executed based on the fact that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, after the end of the first suggestion effect Since the second suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the game is performed in the hope that the second suggestion effect will be executed after the end of the first suggestion effect. There is an effect that can be made.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, when the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction during the predetermined period, the second determination information acquisition means obtains the second information that is at least the predetermined number of information or more A gaming machine F7 characterized in that it is a length of time during which the discrimination information is acquired.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, when it becomes the second privilege game and continues to fire the game ball in the second direction for a predetermined period, the discrimination information storage means Since the second determination information of the predetermined number of information which is the upper limit is stored, there is an effect that the second determination of the number of times corresponding to the upper limit number can be executed after the end of the second privilege game.

  In the gaming machine F7, the game ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a position where it can easily enter, and can be changed between a first state where the game ball can enter and a second state where the game ball is difficult to enter. Possible second variable ball entry means, variable control means for changing the state of the second variable ball entry means to the first state during the predetermined period, and a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the player has struck, a game ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a reachable position, and the game ball that has reached is provided by the second ball entry means. A gaming machine F8, comprising: a first flow path that is provided, and a distribution means that distributes to either the second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, the following effects are produced. Second variable entry means that can be varied between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter. Is arranged. The state of the second variable entry means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period by the variable control means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second variable entry means, the privilege provision means gives a predetermined benefit. The first flow path in which the second ball entry means is provided for the game ball at the position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach, and the second flow path in which the second variable ball entry means is provided. The distribution means which distributes to either is arranged.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that it can suppress that the flow direction of the game ball launched in the 2nd direction deviates.

  In the gaming machine F8, the distribution means distributes gaming balls alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path, and the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F8, the gaming balls launched in the second direction during the predetermined period in the second privilege game are transferred to the second entering means and the second variable entering means. The balls can be entered alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely prevent the game ball launched in the second direction from entering the second entry means or the second variable entry means in a biased manner.

<Characteristic G group> (Notify the jackpot type based on winning V)
A discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition; a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a result of discrimination by the discriminating means; and a game ball Can be changed to a ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first position. And a variable control means for varying the means and the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during execution of the bonus game, and the bonus game is completed As a later gaming state, a first gaming state advantageous to a player is set when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the special game, and the incoming game is performed during execution of the special game. If the game ball does not enter the means, the first game state The game state setting means for setting the second game state which is disadvantageous to the player, and the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game and the player more than the first privilege game. A type determining unit that determines one type from a plurality of types including at least an advantageous second privilege game, and at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determining unit. And a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting the determined type of the bonus game based on the game ball entering the entrance means. Machine G1.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional type gaming machine, the display is subjected to a variable display of symbols, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a variety of entertainment effects are executed to improve the entertainment of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-151867). 2003-325886). In addition, among the conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that does not notify the gaming state after the winning when the winning is won and performs an effect suggesting the gaming state after the winning during the winning state. Are known. However, such a conventional gaming machine has a problem that the remaining winning games become monotonous after the performance suggesting the gaming state after the winning is executed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. A privilege game advantageous to the game is executed. The variable means is varied between a first position where the game ball can enter the game entry means where the game ball can enter and a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means for a predetermined period based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game. As a gaming state after the award game is ended, a first gaming state advantageous to the player is set by the gaming state setting means when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the bonus game. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game, the game state setting means sets a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. It is determined by the type determining means. When at least the first award game or the second award game is determined by the type determining means, an effect suggesting the type of the determined award game is entered into the entering means by the suggesting effect executing means. It is executed based on that.

  As a result, even after the game ball enters the ball entry means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is confirmed, attention is paid to the type of privilege game suggested by the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means. To play games. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous after entering the game ball into the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine G1, the determination unit includes a first determination unit that executes a first determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition as the determination condition, and a second determination different from the first determination condition. Second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of the condition, wherein the type determination means has obtained the specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination means. As a type of the award game executed based on the first award game, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least the first award game and the second award game, and the second discrimination means determines the second type As the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained in the determination, the entry means during execution of the privilege game rather than the first privilege game and the second privilege game The third privilege that game balls are difficult to enter One type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a technique, and the first bonus game is more specific than the second bonus game in the predetermined period after the bonus game ends. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that discrimination is facilitated.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the first determination unit executes the first determination by the determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A plurality of types including at least a first award game and a second award game by the type determining unit as the types of the award game executed based on the specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination unit. One type is determined from the types. On the other hand, during the execution of the bonus game as compared to the first bonus game and the second bonus game as the type of bonus game executed based on the specific determination result in the second determination by the second determination means. One type is determined by the type determination unit from among a plurality of types including at least the third privilege game that is difficult to enter the ball entry unit. In the first privilege game, the second determination is more easily performed in a predetermined period after the privilege game is ended than in the second privilege game.

  As a result, when the first privilege game ends, the disadvantageous second determination is easily performed in the predetermined period, and therefore, it is more strongly expected that the second privilege game is determined when a specific determination result is obtained. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to the type of privilege game.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, a specific effect is executed in which a specific effect is executed at least in a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started until the game ball enters the ball entry means. And the suggestion effect executing means executes an effect suggesting a type of the bonus game as a result of the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are produced. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means at least during the period from the start of the first privilege game or the second privilege game until the game ball enters the ball entering means. As a result of the specific effect, the suggestion effect executing means executes an effect that suggests the type of privilege game.

  Thereby, since it can show to a series of production | presentation with the specific production | presentation and the production which suggests the kind of privilege game, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display means for displaying a dynamic display of identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display means in the display means Identification information capable of determining one identification information from among a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information as the identification information dynamically displayed by Determining means, wherein the identification information determining means is the first identification information when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining means and the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. And when the second bonus game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is displayed by the dynamic display means. As the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one identification information among the plurality of identification information including at least the first identification information and the second identification information different from the first identification information is the identification information. Determined by the determining means. The identification information determination means determines the first identification information when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means and the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determination means.

  Thereby, the dynamic display of identification information can be confirmed in expectation that the 2nd identification information determined only by an advantageous 2nd privilege game will be displayed by dynamic display. Further, by adopting a configuration in which the first identification information can be displayed even in the case of the second award game, when the first identification information is displayed, the player's sense of expectation for the second award game can be maintained. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine G4, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, The types of the suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and the first identification information is the second information. A gaming machine G5, characterized in that at least a second suggestion effect that can be changed to identification information is provided.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. As the type of the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information and the first identification information are changed to the second identification information. At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

  Thereby, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation that the second suggestion effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine G5, when the first award game or the second award game is determined by the type determining unit, the gaming machine G5 includes a suggestion effect execution determination unit that determines whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, The identification information determination means determines the first identification information based on the fact that the suggestion effect execution determination means determines that the suggestion effect is executed, and the suggestion effect execution means includes the type determination means. The first award game is determined, and when it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determination means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the first suggestion effect is executed, and the second determination game is determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine G6 is configured to execute the second suggestion effect when the suggestion effect determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, the suggestion effect execution determining means determines whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determination means based on the determination that the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution determination means. The first suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means when the first identification information is determined by the type determination means and the suggestion effect execution determination means determines that the suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means and the suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means executes the second suggestion effect.

  Thereby, since the second suggestion effect is executed only when the second privilege game is determined, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed.

  In the gaming machine G6, the suggestion effect execution determination means executes the suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined rather than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that the rate of discrimination increases.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G6, the suggestion effect executing means is more effective when the second privilege game is determined than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. Since the ratio determined when the suggestion effect is executed becomes high, there is an effect that the expectation for the second privilege game can be improved when the suggestion effect is started.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, display means capable of displaying the identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display thereof Over a period of dynamic display of identification information indicating the specific determination result executed by the execution means, and a period from when the privilege game is started until at least the variable means is changed to the first position. Specific suggestion execution means for executing a specific effect, and the suggestion effect execution means executes a suggestion effect suggesting a type of the bonus game as a result of the specific effect. Gaming machine G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are produced. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means and the time from when the privilege game is started until at least the variable means is biased to the first position 2 Over the period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. As a result of the specific effect, the suggestion effect suggesting the type of the bonus game is executed by the suggestion effect executing means.

  Thereby, since it can show to a series of production | presentation with the specific production | presentation and the production which suggests the kind of privilege game, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Variable ease of predicting whether or not there are consecutive occurrences depending on the type of jackpot)
A determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result obtained by the determination means; Type determination for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game as a bonus game type executed by the bonus game executing means. The first variable mode and its first variable based on the result of the determination, the variable unit that can be varied in a predetermined variable mode, and the discriminating by the discriminating unit that is different from the specific discrimination result. A first variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of a plurality of variable aspects including at least a second variable aspect different from the aspect, and the specific determination result by the determination by the determination means. The second variable control means for changing the variable means in a third variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode, and the first privilege game The first variable control means sets the first variable state in which the variable means is likely to be changed in the first variable mode from the end to when the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the second privilege Variable state setting means for setting a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed in the second variable mode than in the first variable state between the end of the game and the establishment of the specific condition; A gaming machine H1 comprising:

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is informed that the winning is made at the time of winning, and the winning type is also notified, so after the notification is made, it is simply notified. In some cases, the game would be a simple task, and the game would become monotonous. Also, in conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to identify whether a winning state or a small hit, which is a kind of losing, from the production mode or the opening / closing operation of the specific prize opening. There is also a known gaming machine, and there is also a gaming machine that can be expected to win after the winning game is over. However, in such a gaming machine, it takes too much time to determine whether the game is a win or a small win, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player in games will be impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. Based on the determination result obtained by the determination means, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected by the type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. It is determined. A plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode based on the determination by the determining unit that results in an outlier determination result different from the specific determination result. The variable means is varied by the first variable control means in any one of the variable modes. The variable means is controlled by the second variable control means in the third variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode based on the determination result by the determination unit. Variable. The first variable state is easily changed by the first variable control means in the first variable mode from the end of the first privilege game until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Is set. On the other hand, the variable state setting means sets the second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed in the second variable mode than the first variable state between the end of the second privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition. Is done.

  As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable mode of the variable means between the case where the result of the first bonus game ends and the case where the result is a specific determination result, and at least the specific condition is satisfied. In the meantime, it can be difficult to identify whether or not the privilege game is executed from the variable mode of the variable means. On the other hand, if the result of determination of detachment after the end of the second privilege game is reached, the second variable mode is set, so that the player can relatively identify whether or not the result of determination of detachment has been obtained from the variable mode of the variable means. It becomes easy. Therefore, since the ease of identifying the result of determination of detachment until the specific condition is satisfied can be varied according to the type of the bonus game, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine H1 includes a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and the variable means has a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball more than the first position. Is variable to the second position where it becomes difficult to enter the ball, and the first variable mode is configured such that the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period. The second variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of a second period different from the first period. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is configured in a variable mode in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period. The second variable mode is a second variable different from the first period. Based on the passage of the period, the variable means is configured to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

  Thus, the effect that the player can easily identify whether the variable means is the first variable mode or the second variable mode by checking the interval until the variable means is changed to the first position. There is.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the determination means includes a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. Second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination based on the establishment, wherein the first variable control means is based on the fact that the discriminating result by the discriminating by the first discriminating means is the detachment judgment result. The variable means is varied in any one of a plurality of variable aspects including at least one variable aspect and the second variable aspect, and the second variable control means is the first determining means. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the variable means is varied in the third variable manner based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained in the determination by (1).

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode based on the result of the determination by the first determination unit. The variable means is varied by the means. The variable means is varied in the third variable manner by the second variable control means based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means.

  Thereby, according to the type of the bonus game, the variable mode of the variable means in the case where the determination result by the first determination means results in an outage determination result is varied, so the first determination means until the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means each time the determination by is performed.

  In the gaming machine H3, the type determining unit determines a type of the privilege game to be executed based on the fact that the second determination unit has achieved the specific determination result. A gaming machine H4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H3, the type of privilege game executed based on the fact that the second discrimination by the second discrimination means has resulted in a specific discrimination result is determined by the type determination means. Since it is determined, when the second determination by the second determination means is executed, it is possible to make the game play while paying attention to whether the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is more easily established than the second determination condition until the specific condition is satisfied after the bonus game ends. A gaming machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is satisfied from the second determination condition until the specific condition is satisfied after the bonus game is completed. Since it becomes easy, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the game ball launched in the first direction is launched in a second direction different from the first direction, and the first ball entry means provided at a position where the ball can enter. A second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball can enter and a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter and predetermined based on the game ball entering Based on the start of the bonus game, the bonus ball entering means to which the bonus ball is given is changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, based on the start of the bonus game. Variable control means for varying a predetermined number of times in a possible second state, the first determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, The second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means. Gaming machine H6-and wherein the the at it.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and the game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction is placed at a position where the game ball can be entered. Two entry means are provided. A privilege entry means for providing a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter. The state of the privilege entry means is changed by the variable control means a predetermined number of times from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, to the second state in which the game ball can enter, based on the start of the privilege game. The first discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second discrimination condition is based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. It is established.

  Thereby, a game ball can be made to enter the 1st entrance means by aiming at the benefit entrance means during execution of an award game. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily established when the privilege game is executed.

  In the gaming machine H6, first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the first discrimination information acquisition means Discriminating information storage means capable of storing the first discriminating information acquired by the one discriminating information acquiring means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit; A gaming machine H7, which is established based on execution of discrimination based on all the first discrimination information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, the first discrimination information acquisition means acquires the first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means. The first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition unit is stored by the discrimination information storage unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. The specific condition is established based on the fact that the discrimination based on all the first discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means at the end of the privilege game is executed.

  Thereby, since the 1st discrimination information acquired during execution of a privilege game is memorized by discrimination information storage means, there is an effect that the 1st discrimination can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine H7, the gaming state after the bonus game is ended is selected from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A game state determination unit for determining one game state, wherein the type determination unit is configured to use the game state as a privilege game type to be executed based on a result of the specific determination in the first determination. The first type determining means in which the ratio for determining the third award game for which the first gaming state is determined by the determining means is higher than the ratio for determining the type of another award game, and the identification in the second discrimination The second type for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least the first bonus game and the second bonus game as the bonus game type executed based on the determination result of A determination means; The gaming state determining means determines the second gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game is ended when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is reached. A gaming machine H8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the following effects are produced. That is, one gaming state out of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the award game has ended. Is determined by the gaming state determination means. As the type of privilege game to be executed based on the result of the specific determination in the first determination, the first type determination unit determines the third privilege game in which the first game state is determined by the game state determination unit. The ratio of being played is higher than the ratio of determining the type of other bonus game. As a type of privilege game to be executed based on a specific determination result in the second determination, one type is selected from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game. It is determined by the two type determining means. When the first bonus game or the second bonus game is reached, the gaming state determining means determines the second gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game is ended.

  As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first determination, the first determination state stored in the determination information storage means during the execution of the privilege game is high because the ratio of the first game state being determined after the end of the privilege game is high. Based on the information, it is possible to cause the game to be performed in the hope that all the first determinations performed after the end of the bonus game will be out of place and become a determination result. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a novel game that makes it desirable to avoid a specific discrimination result, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Characteristic group I> (Ease of occurrence of holding reams varies according to jackpot type)
A first discriminating means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a first discrimination condition; a second discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition; Based on the determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the privilege game execution means As a type of the award game to be executed, the first award game and the determination by the second determination means between the end of the award game and the establishment of the specific condition rather than the first award game. As a gaming state after the bonus game has ended, a type determination means for determining a type of the bonus game of one of a plurality including at least a second bonus game that is likely to be a specific determination result, and a first gaming state And its Gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality including at least a second gaming state different from one gaming state, wherein the first privilege game and the second privilege game are either The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that, as the gaming state after the bonus game is finished, the set ratio of the first gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a winning. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). Also, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous by changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have a difference in degree. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the first determination means is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The discrimination is performed by the two discrimination means. Based on the result of the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. As the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the determination by the second determination means between the first privilege game and the first privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied after the bonus game is completed. The type of the award game is determined by the type determining means from a plurality including at least the second award game that is likely to have a specific determination result. The gaming state setting means sets one gaming state among at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state as the gaming state after the award game is ended. . As for the 1st privilege game and the 2nd privilege game, the setting ratio of the 2nd game state becomes high rather than the 2nd game state as a game state after the privilege game is complete | finished.

  Thereby, depending on whether it becomes the first privilege game or the second privilege game, the possibility of a specific determination result in the determination by the second determination means before the specific condition is satisfied, There is an effect that a game can be played while paying attention to the type of privilege game determined by the type determination means.

  In the game I1, the type determining means includes at least a first bonus game, a second bonus game, and a third bonus game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other bonus game types. 1 for determining the type of the award game, and the third privilege game is determined by the determination by the second determination means rather than the determination by the first determination means. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the ratio determined by the type determining means is high.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the type of one privilege game is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game, a second privilege game, and a third privilege game that is more disadvantageous to the player than another privilege game type. Determined by. The rate at which the third award game is determined by the type determining unit is higher when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determining unit than by the determination by the first determining unit.

  As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means, the rate at which the disadvantageous third privilege game is determined increases, so that the determination by the second determination means does not result in a specific determination result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in anticipation of becoming the first privilege game, rather than the second privilege game that is likely to have a specific determination result by the determination by the second determination means.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the first gaming state has a probability that the specific determination result is obtained when the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit is performed. The second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition between the end of the second privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state is configured such that the probability of a specific determination result when the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit is performed is higher than that of the second gaming state. . The second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition until the specific condition is satisfied after the end of the second privilege game.

  Thereby, in the first gaming state, the probability of a specific determination result is higher than in the second gaming state, so that it becomes easy to become a privilege game continuously at relatively short intervals. Therefore, when it becomes the 1st game state, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, a discrimination information acquisition unit that acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination unit, and the discrimination information acquisition unit that acquires the discrimination information Based on discrimination information storage means capable of storing discrimination information with an upper limit of a predetermined number of information, and the one discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means being used for discrimination by the second discrimination means An erasing unit that erases the one discrimination information from the discrimination information storage unit, and the specific condition is that the number of pieces of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage unit is zero A gaming machine I4 that is established based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination unit is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit is stored in the discrimination information storage unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Based on the fact that one discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, the one discrimination information is erased from the discrimination information storage means by the erasure means. The specific condition is established based on the fact that the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes zero.

  As a result, until the number of pieces of information in the discrimination information becomes zero, the discrimination by the second discrimination means is likely to give a specific discrimination result, so that the game is played by paying attention to the number of information stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the game ball launched in the first direction is launched in a second direction different from the first direction, and the first ball entering means arranged at a position where the game ball can enter. Second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball can enter, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second bonus game is started when the bonus game is started. The gaming machine I5 is characterized in that it is more advantageous for a player to launch a game ball in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period thereafter.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first entrance means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter. Second entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. The first discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first entrance means, while the second discrimination condition is that the game ball enters the second entrance means. Based on In the second privilege game, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period after the privilege game is started.

  Thereby, when it becomes a 2nd privilege game, a game ball can be made to enter also into a 2nd entrance means by firing a game ball to a 2nd direction in a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the second determination condition is easily established after the end of the privilege game.

  In the gaming machine I5, a game ball launched in the first direction is disposed at a position where the game ball can enter, and a first that can be changed between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter. A variable ball entry means and a game ball launched in the second direction are arranged at positions where the game ball can enter, and the game ball can be varied between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter. A bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on a game ball entering the first variable pitching means or the second variable pitching means; 2. The game machine I6, wherein the two variable ball entry means is changed to a state in which a game ball can enter during at least the predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I5, the following effects are produced. That is, the first variable entry means that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult to enter a game ball is disposed at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter. Has been. A second variable entrance means that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult to enter the game ball is disposed at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. Yes. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege grant means. The second variable entry means is changed to a state in which the game ball can enter at least for a predetermined period during execution of the second scoring game.

  Thereby, in a predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game, a game ball can be fired in the second direction for a player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be entered into the second entry means during the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine I6, the first variable entry means is configured to be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter during at least the predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game. A gaming machine I7.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I6, during execution of the first scoring game, the first variable pitching means can be changed to a state in which the gaming ball can be pitched at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, during a predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game, a game ball can be fired in the first direction to a player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball can be prevented from entering the second ball entry means during a predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game.

  In any of the gaming machines I5 to I7, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means, a discrimination information acquisition means for obtaining discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means; Discriminating information storage means capable of storing the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the predetermined period. In this case, the gaming machine I8 has a length of time during which at least the predetermined number of pieces of the second determination information is acquired by the determination information acquisition means.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I5 to I7, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. The predetermined period is configured with a length at which at least a predetermined number of pieces of second discriminating information is acquired by the discriminating information storage means when the game ball is continuously released in the second direction.

  Thereby, when it becomes a 2nd privilege game, there exists an effect that discrimination | determination information can be reliably memorize | stored in the discrimination | determination information storage means to the upper limit information number.

  In the gaming machine I8, the first flow path in which the second ball entry means is provided and the second flow path in which the second variable ball entry means are provided for the game balls launched in the second direction. A game machine I9 comprising a distribution means that can be distributed to either of the above.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I8, the gaming ball launched in the second direction is provided with the first flow path in which the second entering means is provided and the second variable entering means. Since it is distributed to either the second flow path provided by the distributing means, the game balls launched in the second direction are biased to enter the second incoming means, or conversely, the second There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the entry into the variable entry means biased.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z1 characterized by being. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a slot machine A gaming machine Z2 characterized by that. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z3, which is a fusion of a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 First entrance (first entry means)
65a Specific winning entrance (entrance means)
65f1 door (variable means)
640 Second entrance (second entry means)
S220 Bonus game execution means S254 Variable state setting means S305 Discrimination means, first discrimination means, second discrimination means S306 Type determination means S1004 Part of second variable control means S1606 Part of first variable control means S2006 First variable control Part of the means

Claims (5)

Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the discrimination condition;
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player,
A type for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game as a bonus game type executed by the bonus game executing means. A determination means;
Variable means that can be varied in a predetermined variable manner;
A plurality of variables including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode based on the determination by the determining means that the discrepancy determination result is different from the specific determination result. First variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of the variable aspects;
A second variable unit that varies the variable unit in a third variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode based on the determination result by the determination unit. Variable control means;
A first variable state in which the variable means is easily variable in the first variable mode is set by the first variable control means between the end of the first privilege game and the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. And setting a second variable state in which the variable means is more easily variable in the second variable mode than in the first variable state between the end of the second privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition. And a variable state setting means. It has a ball entry means that allows game balls to enter,
The variable means is variable to a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position,
The first variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period.
The second variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of a second period different from the first period. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The discrimination means includes
First determination means for performing the first determination based on establishment of the first determination condition;
Second determination means for executing a second determination based on establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition;
The first variable control means includes a plurality of variable aspects including at least the first variable aspect and the second variable aspect on the basis of the result of the determination by the first determining means being the outlier determination result. The variable means is varied in any one variable manner,
The second variable control unit is configured to vary the variable unit in the third variable mode based on the determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination unit. Item 3. A gaming machine according to item 1 or 2.   The type determining means determines the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained in the second determination by the second determination means. Item 4. The gaming machine according to Item 3.   The first determination condition is more easily established than the second determination condition from the end of the bonus game until the specific condition is satisfied. 4. The gaming machine according to 4.

Images